WO2023174212A1 - 长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备 - Google Patents

长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023174212A1
WO2023174212A1 PCT/CN2023/081097 CN2023081097W WO2023174212A1 WO 2023174212 A1 WO2023174212 A1 WO 2023174212A1 CN 2023081097 W CN2023081097 W CN 2023081097W WO 2023174212 A1 WO2023174212 A1 WO 2023174212A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
lens
lens group
telephoto
focal length
group
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/081097
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
王恒
牛亚军
卢建龙
叶海水
唐玮
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023174212A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023174212A1/zh

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B13/00—Optical objectives specially designed for the purposes specified below
    • G02B13/02—Telephoto objectives, i.e. systems of the type + - in which the distance from the front vertex to the image plane is less than the equivalent focal length
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B13/00—Optical objectives specially designed for the purposes specified below
    • G02B13/24—Optical objectives specially designed for the purposes specified below for reproducing or copying at short object distances
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B7/00—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
    • G02B7/02—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses
    • G02B7/04—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification
    • G02B7/10—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification by relative axial movement of several lenses, e.g. of varifocal objective lens
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B30/00—Camera modules comprising integrated lens units and imaging units, specially adapted for being embedded in other devices, e.g. mobile phones or vehicles

Definitions

  • This application relates to the technical field of photographing equipment, and in particular to a telephoto lens, a camera module and an electronic device.
  • Existing telephoto lenses are mainly used for long-range shooting. When shooting distant scenery or inaccessible objects, the telephoto lens can show the details of distant objects and has better long-range shooting capabilities. However, existing telephoto lenses have poor imaging effects when shooting close-up shots, which limits the application of telephoto lenses in close-up shooting scenarios.
  • This application provides a telephoto lens, a camera module and electronic equipment.
  • the telephoto lens can not only achieve long-distance shooting with high imaging quality, but also have strong close-range shooting capabilities, achieving a wide object distance from distant views to close-up views. Imaging.
  • this application provides a telephoto lens.
  • the telephoto lens When the telephoto lens focuses on a distant scene, the field of view of the telephoto lens is less than 60°.
  • the telephoto lens includes a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group has positive refractive power and the second lens group has negative refractive power.
  • the telephoto lens is between distant view and close view. During the focus switching process, the distance between the first lens group and the second lens group changes, and the minimum focusing distance of the telephoto lens is less than 10 cm.
  • the telephoto lens provided by this application can not only achieve long-distance shooting with high imaging quality, but also has strong close-range shooting capabilities, achieving wide object distance imaging from distant views to close-up views.
  • the first lens group has positive optical power and the second lens group has negative optical power, making the height of the telephoto lens smaller than the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens to reduce the height of the telephoto lens, which is beneficial to the camera module of miniaturization.
  • the distance between the first lens group and the second lens group increases.
  • the distance between the first lens group and the second lens group increases, and higher close-up imaging quality can be obtained.
  • the distance between the first lens group and the second lens group may also be reduced, which is not limited in this application.
  • the distance between the first lens group and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens remains unchanged, and the distance between the second lens group and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens remains unchanged. The distance between them decreases;
  • the distance between the first lens group and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens increases, and the distance between the second lens group and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens remains unchanged;
  • the distance between the first lens group and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens increases, and the distance between the second lens group and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens decreases.
  • a single group focusing method can be used to simplify the movement of the focusing structure and simplify the focusing method.
  • the first lens group does not move, and by moving the second lens group to focus, the movement mode of the focusing structure of the telephoto lens can be simplified, thereby simplifying the focusing method.
  • the first lens group is located on the object side of the second lens group, which increases the movable optical path space, which is beneficial to reducing the turning angle of light, reducing aberrations, and improving imaging quality.
  • the second lens group does not move and moves Moving the first lens group for focusing can simplify the movement of the focusing structure of the telephoto lens, thereby simplifying the focusing method.
  • a dual group focusing method can also be used.
  • the distances between the first lens group and the second lens group and the imaging surface change, thereby reducing the respective distances between the first lens group and the second lens group.
  • the focusing stroke can also improve the movement accuracy of the first lens group and the second lens group, and improve the focusing capability of the telephoto lens.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens satisfy: F1 ⁇ 0.9EFL, or, 0.9EFL ⁇ F1 ⁇ EFL.
  • the focal length of the first lens group is smaller and the ability to gather light is stronger, enabling the telephoto lens to be used within 10 cm Close-up shot.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens satisfy: -EFL ⁇ F2.
  • the thickness of the second lens group can be reduced, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens for easy storage; and making the second lens group have a smaller focal length and less ability to gather light. Stronger, easier to focus and reduce the motor stroke.
  • the thickness of the second lens group is small, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens, which is beneficial to the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group and the focal length F2 of the second lens group satisfy: 1 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 3, or 3 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 9.
  • the telephoto lens when the focal lengths of the two lens groups are relatively small, and the focal length difference between the two lens groups is small, that is, the value of (F1-F2)/F1 is small, the telephoto lens will increase its sensitivity to light.
  • the convergence ability is beneficial to achieving close-range imaging; however, it will increase the degree of light deflection of the telephoto lens and increase aberrations, resulting in unclear imaging and poor imaging quality.
  • the focal length of the second lens group When the focal length of the second lens group is larger and is significantly different from the focal length of the first lens group, that is, the value of (F1-F2)/F1 is larger, it will reduce the light-gathering ability of the telephoto lens, which is not conducive to the realization of Close-range imaging; but it will reduce the degree of light deflection of the telephoto lens, reduce aberrations, and improve imaging quality. Therefore, the focal lengths of the two lens groups can be designed according to the needs of actual application scenarios. By setting 1 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 3, or 3 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 9, the focusing ability and image quality of the telephoto lens can be improved.
  • the first lens group includes two to four lenses; or the second lens group includes two to four lenses; or the telephoto lens includes four to eight lenses.
  • the telephoto lens will have high specifications and high imaging quality, but it will also increase the number of lenses in the first lens group and the second lens group.
  • Design difficulty the number of lenses in the first lens group and the second lens group is small, and the design difficulty of each lens in the first lens group and the second lens group is low, but the specifications of the telephoto lens are low and the imaging quality is poor.
  • the first lens group includes a first lens close to the object side, and the focal length f11 of the first lens of the first lens group and the focal length F1 of the first lens group satisfy: 0.5 ⁇ f11/F1 ⁇ 1;
  • the second lens group includes a first lens close to the object side.
  • the focal length f21 of the first lens of the second lens group and the focal length F2 of the second lens group satisfy: 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1.
  • the focal length of the first lens of the first lens group is less different from the focal length of the first lens group, which facilitates adjustment of the focal length of the first lens. To obtain the focal length of the first lens group.
  • the focal length of the first lens of the second lens group is smaller than the focal length of the second lens group, making it easier to adjust the focal length of the first lens to obtain the second lens.
  • the focal length of the lens group is designed by designing 0.2 ⁇ f21/F1 ⁇ 1, the focal length of the first lens of the second lens group is smaller than the focal length of the second lens group, making it easier to adjust the focal length of the first lens to obtain the second lens. The focal length of the lens group.
  • the first lens group further includes a second lens.
  • the second lens of the first lens group is adjacent to the object side of the first lens of the first lens group.
  • the first lens of the first lens group The sum of the Abbe number of the lens and the Abbe number of the second lens of the first lens group is greater than 20.
  • the sum of the Abbe number of the first lens and the Abbe number of the second lens can be greater than 20, which is beneficial to the correction of chromatic aberration of the telephoto lens.
  • the sum of Abbe numbers of multiple lenses of the second lens group is greater than 18.
  • the sum of the Abbe numbers of the multiple lenses of the second lens group is greater than 18, which is beneficial to the correction of chromatic aberration of the telephoto lens.
  • the thickness T1 of the first lens group and the focal length F1 of the first lens group satisfy: 0.1 ⁇ T1/F1 ⁇ 0.3, or, 0.3 ⁇ T1/F1 ⁇ 1;
  • the thickness T2 of the second lens group and the focal length F2 of the second lens group satisfy: -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1.
  • the thickness of the first lens group is smaller, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens for easy storage; and It facilitates the movement of the first lens group and improves imaging quality.
  • the second lens group has a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group, improving Imaging quality.
  • the thickness T1 of the first lens group, the thickness T2 of the second lens group and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens satisfy: T1+T2 ⁇ 0.6EFL, or, 0.6EFL ⁇ T1+T2 ⁇ 0.8EFL, or ,0.8EFL ⁇ T1+T2 ⁇ EFL.
  • the thickness of the first lens group and the thickness of the second lens group are set.
  • the thickness of the first lens group and the thickness of the second lens group The sum of the thicknesses is small, so that when the telephoto lens is in the stored state, the overall height of the camera module is smaller, and it occupies a smaller space in the inner cavity of the electronic device, making it easier to store and better applicable. in thin electronic devices.
  • the image height ImgH of the telephoto lens satisfies: ImgH>2 mm.
  • the telephoto lens has a small field of view and a large panel size, so as to have strong long-range shooting capabilities and high imaging quality in long-range shooting.
  • this application also provides a camera module, including a photosensitive element, a first driving mechanism and a telephoto lens.
  • the photosensitive element is located on the image side of the telephoto lens; the first driving mechanism is connected to the telephoto lens for controlling The telephoto lens moves closer to or away from the sensor.
  • the camera module provided by this application can not only achieve long-distance shooting with high imaging quality, but also have strong close-range shooting capabilities, achieving wide object distance imaging from distant views to close-up views.
  • the telephoto lens provided by this application can not only achieve long-distance shooting with high imaging quality, but also has strong close-range shooting capabilities, achieving wide object distance imaging from distant views to close-up views.
  • this application can realize auto focus (AF) through the first driving mechanism.
  • the camera module also includes a second driving mechanism.
  • the second driving mechanism is connected to the first lens group and is used to control the movement of the first lens group along the optical axis;
  • the camera module further includes a third driving mechanism, the third driving mechanism is connected with the second lens group and is used to control the movement of the second lens group along the optical axis.
  • the second driving mechanism is used to control the first lens group to move along the optical axis to change the distance between the first lens group and the second lens group to realize the telephoto lens between the distant view mode and the close-up mode. switch.
  • the third driving mechanism is used to control the second lens group to move along the optical axis to change the distance between the first lens group and the second lens group to achieve switching of the telephoto lens between distant view mode and close-up mode.
  • this application also provides an electronic device, including an image processor and a camera module.
  • the image processor is communicatively connected to the camera module.
  • the image processor is used to obtain image signals from the camera module and process the image signals.
  • the electronic equipment please provide can not only achieve long-distance shooting with high imaging quality, but also have strong close-range shooting capabilities to achieve wide object distance imaging from distant views to close-up views.
  • this application provides an electronic device, including a first lens and a second lens.
  • the second lens is a 3x optical zoom lens of the first lens; when the second lens focuses on a distant view, the field of view of the second lens Less than 60°; the second lens includes a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group has positive refractive power
  • the second lens group has negative refractive power
  • the second lens is in the distant view.
  • the distance between the first lens group and the second lens group changes, and the minimum focusing distance of the second lens is less than 10 cm.
  • the electronic device provided by this application can not only achieve long-distance shooting with high imaging quality, but also have strong close-range shooting capabilities, realizing wide object distance imaging from distant views to close-range views.
  • the distance between the first lens group and the imaging surface of the second lens remains unchanged, and the distance between the second lens group and the imaging surface of the second lens remains unchanged. The distance between them decreases;
  • the distance between the first lens group and the imaging surface of the second lens increases, and the distance between the second lens group and the imaging surface of the second lens remains unchanged;
  • the distance between the first lens group and the imaging surface of the second lens increases, and the distance between the second lens group and the imaging surface of the second lens decreases.
  • a single group focusing method can be used to simplify the movement of the focusing structure and simplify the focusing method.
  • the first lens group does not move, and by moving the second lens group to focus, the movement mode of the focusing structure of the telephoto lens can be simplified, thereby simplifying the focusing method.
  • the first lens group is located on the object side of the second lens group, which increases the movable optical path space, which is beneficial to reducing the turning angle of light, reducing aberrations, and improving imaging quality.
  • the second lens group does not move, and by moving the first lens group to focus, the movement method of the focusing structure of the telephoto lens can be simplified, thereby simplifying the focusing method.
  • a dual group focusing method can also be used.
  • the distances between the first lens group and the second lens group and the imaging surface change, thereby reducing the respective distances between the first lens group and the second lens group.
  • the focusing stroke can also improve the movement accuracy of the first lens group and the second lens group, and improve the focusing capability of the telephoto lens.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group and the effective focal length EFL of the second lens satisfy: F1 ⁇ 0.9EFL, or, 0.9EFL ⁇ F1 ⁇ EFL.
  • the focal length of the first lens group is smaller and the ability to gather light is stronger, enabling the telephoto lens to be used within 10 cm Close-up shot.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group and the effective focal length EFL of the second lens satisfy: -EFL ⁇ F2.
  • the thickness of the second lens group can be reduced, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens for easy storage; and making the second lens group have a smaller focal length and less ability to gather light. Stronger, easier to focus and reduce the motor stroke.
  • the thickness of the second lens group is small, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens, which is beneficial to the miniaturization of the camera module.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group and the focal length F2 of the second lens group satisfy: 1 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 3, or 3 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 9.
  • the telephoto lens when the focal lengths of the two lens groups are relatively small, and the focal length difference between the two lens groups is small, that is, the value of (F1-F2)/F1 is small, the telephoto lens will increase its sensitivity to light.
  • the convergence ability is beneficial to achieving close-range imaging; however, it will increase the degree of light deflection of the telephoto lens and increase aberrations, resulting in unclear imaging and poor imaging quality.
  • the focal length of the second lens group is larger and is significantly different from the focal length of the first lens group, that is, the value of (F1-F2)/F1 is larger, it will reduce the light-gathering ability of the telephoto lens, which is not conducive to the realization of Close-range imaging; but it will reduce the degree of light deflection of the telephoto lens, reduce aberrations, and improve imaging quality. Therefore, the two penetrations can be configured according to the needs of actual application scenarios.
  • the focal length of the lens group is designed. By setting 1 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 3, or 3 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 9, the focusing ability and image quality of the telephoto lens can be improved.
  • the thickness T1 of the first lens group and the focal length F1 of the first lens group satisfy: 0.1 ⁇ T1/F1 ⁇ 0.3, or, 0.3 ⁇ T1/F1 ⁇ 1;
  • the thickness T2 of the second lens group and the focal length F2 of the second lens group satisfy: -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1.
  • the thickness of the first lens group is smaller, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens for easy storage; and It facilitates the movement of the first lens group and improves imaging quality.
  • the second lens group has a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group, improving Imaging quality.
  • the thickness T1 of the first lens group, the thickness T2 of the second lens group, and the effective focal length EFL of the second lens satisfy: T1+T2 ⁇ 0.6EFL, or, 0.6EFL ⁇ T1+T2 ⁇ 0.8EFL, or ,0.8EFL ⁇ T1+T2 ⁇ EFL.
  • the thickness of the first lens group and the thickness of the second lens group are set.
  • the thickness of the first lens group and the thickness of the second lens group The sum of the thicknesses is small, so that when the telephoto lens is in the stored state, the overall height of the camera module is smaller, and it occupies a smaller space in the inner cavity of the electronic device, making it easier to store and better applicable. in thin electronic devices.
  • the image height ImgH of the second lens satisfies: ImgH>2 mm.
  • the telephoto lens has a small field of view and a large panel size, so as to have strong long-range shooting capabilities and high imaging quality in long-range shooting.
  • Figure 1A is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application in some embodiments.
  • Figure 1B is a schematic diagram of the field of view FOV of the camera module shown in Figure 1A in some application scenarios;
  • Figure 2 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in Figure 1A in some embodiments;
  • Figure 3A is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in Figure 2 in a stored state
  • Figure 3B is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in Figure 3A when it is in a pop-up state and focuses on a distant view;
  • Figure 3C is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in Figure 3A when it is in a pop-up state and focuses on a close-up view;
  • Figure 4A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module focuses on a distant view in the first embodiment provided by this application;
  • Figure 4B is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module shown in Figure 4A when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 4C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 4A when focusing on a distant view
  • Figure 4D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 4B when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 5A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module focuses on a distant view in the second embodiment provided by this application;
  • Figure 5B is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module shown in Figure 5A when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 5C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 5A when focusing on a distant view
  • Figure 5D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 5B when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 6A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module focuses on a distant view in the third embodiment provided by this application;
  • Figure 6B is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module shown in Figure 6A when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 6C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 6A when focusing on a distant view
  • Figure 6D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 6B when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 7A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module focuses on a distant view in the fourth embodiment provided by the present application;
  • Figure 7B is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module shown in Figure 7A when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 7C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 7A when focusing on a distant view
  • Figure 7D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 7B when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 8A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module focuses on a distant view in the fifth embodiment provided by the present application;
  • Figure 8B is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module shown in Figure 8A when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 8C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 8A when focusing on a distant view
  • Figure 8D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens when focusing on a 50mm close-up view shown in Figure 8B;
  • Figure 9A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module focuses on a distant view in the sixth embodiment provided by the present application.
  • Figure 9B is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module shown in Figure 9A when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 9C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 9A when focusing on a distant view
  • Figure 9D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens when focusing on a 50mm close-up view shown in Figure 9B;
  • Figure 10A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module focuses on a distant view in the seventh embodiment provided by the present application;
  • Figure 10B is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module shown in Figure 10A when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 10C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 10A when focusing on a distant view
  • Figure 10D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 10B when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 11A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module focuses on a distant view in the eighth embodiment provided by the present application;
  • Figure 11B is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module shown in Figure 11A when focusing on a 50mm close-up view;
  • Figure 11C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 11A when focusing on a distant view;
  • Figure 11D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens shown in Figure 11B when focusing on a 50mm close-up view.
  • Focal power is equal to the difference between the image-side beam convergence and the object-side beam convergence. It represents the ability of the optical system to deflect light.
  • a lens or lens group with positive refractive power has a positive focal length and has the effect of converging light.
  • a lens or lens group with negative power The lens or lens group has a negative focal length and has the effect of diverging light.
  • Focal length also known as focal length, is a measure of the concentration or divergence of light in an optical system. It refers to the length of a lens or lens when an infinite scene forms a clear image on the image focal plane through a lens or lens group. The vertical distance from the optical center of the group to the image square focal plane. From a practical perspective, it can be understood as the distance from the center of the lens to the plane when the object is at infinity. For a fixed-focus lens, the position of its optical center is fixed; for a telephoto lens, changes in the optical center of the lens bring about changes in the focal length of the lens.
  • the effective focal length (EFL) of a lens refers to the distance from the center of the lens to the focal point.
  • the object side is bounded by the lens, the side where the subject is located is the object side, and the surface of the lens close to the object side is called the object side.
  • the image side is bounded by the lens, the side where the image of the subject is located is the image side, and the surface of the lens close to the image side is called the image side.
  • Object distance is the distance from the subject to the side of the lens.
  • Aperture diaphragm is a device used to control the amount of light passing through the lens and entering the photosensitive surface of the camera body. It is usually inside the lens.
  • Aperture value also known as F number (Fno) is the relative value derived from the focal length of the lens/the diameter of the entrance pupil of the lens (the reciprocal of the relative aperture). The smaller the aperture value, the more light will enter in the same unit of time. The larger the aperture value, the smaller the depth of field, and the background content of the photo will be blurred, similar to the effect of a telephoto lens.
  • Total track length refers to the total length from the surface closest to the object side of the lens to the imaging surface, TT L is the main factor forming the camera height.
  • the imaging surface is located on the image side of all the lenses in the telephoto lens, and the light rays pass through each lens in the telephoto lens in sequence to form an image.
  • Field of view also known as field of view.
  • FOV Field of view
  • the angle formed by taking the lens of the optical instrument as the vertex and the two edges of the maximum range through which the image of the subject can pass through the lens is called the field of view.
  • the optical axis is an axis that passes vertically through the center of the lens.
  • the optical axis of the lens is the axis passing through the center of each lens of the lens.
  • Focus the point of convergence of parallel rays after refraction by a lens or lens group.
  • the image-side focal plane also called the back focal plane or the second focal plane, is a plane that passes through the image-side focus (also called the back focus or the second focus) and is perpendicular to the optical axis of the system.
  • Abbe number is the difference ratio of the refractive index of optical materials at different wavelengths, which represents the degree of dispersion of the material.
  • the paraxial region of the optical system has the properties of an ideal optical system.
  • the paraxial light emitted from a point on the object intersects with the image plane at one point (that is, the paraxial image point).
  • the perfect intersection is at one point, but there is a certain deviation from the position of the paraxial image point. These differences are collectively called aberrations.
  • Axial chromatic aberration (longitudinal spherical aber), also known as longitudinal chromatic aberration or positional chromatic aberration or axial aberration, a beam of light parallel to the optical axis converges at different positions before and after passing through the lens. This aberration is called positional aberration.
  • Chromatic aberration or axial chromatic aberration This is because the lens images different wavelengths of light at different positions, so that the image focal planes of different colors of light cannot overlap during the final imaging, and the polychromatic light spreads out to form dispersion.
  • Distortion also known as distortion
  • Distortion is the degree of distortion of the image formed by the optical system relative to the object itself. Distortion is due to the influence of aperture spherical aberration.
  • the height of the intersection point of the chief ray of different fields of view with the Gaussian image plane after passing through the optical system is not equal to the ideal image height. The difference between the two is distortion. Therefore, distortion only changes the imaging position of the off-axis object point on the ideal surface, causing distortion in the shape of the image, but does not affect the clarity of the image.
  • Image Hight represents half of the diagonal length of the effective pixel area on the photosensitive chip, which is the image height of the imaging surface.
  • Astigmatism means that because the object point is not on the optical axis of the optical system, the light beam it emits has an inclination angle with the optical axis. After the light beam is refracted by the lens, the convergence points of the meridional thin beam and the sagittal thin beam are not at the same point. That is, the light beam cannot be focused on one point and the image is not clear, so astigmatism occurs.
  • Meridianal beamlet and sagittal beamlet are the names of beams in two vertical planes in a rotationally symmetric optical system.
  • Field curvature (curvature of field) is used to represent the difference in the optical axis direction between the position of the clearest image point of the non-center field of view light after passing through the optical lens group and the position of the clearest image point of the center field of view.
  • the lens has field curvature, the intersection point of the entire light beam does not coincide with the ideal image point.
  • the entire image plane is a curved surface.
  • first, second and other words are used for descriptive purposes only and cannot be understood as implying or implying the relative importance or implicitly indicating the quantity of the indicated technical features. From this, it can be understood that the characteristics of “first” and “second” are limited to include one or more of these features explicitly or implicitly.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device.
  • Electronic devices can be mobile phones, tablets, laptops, televisions, vehicle equipment, wearable devices, video surveillance equipment and other electronic products with photo or video functions.
  • Wearable devices can be smart bracelets, smart watches, wireless headsets, augmented reality (AR) glasses, augmented reality helmets, virtual reality (VR) glasses and virtual reality helmets, etc.
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • the embodiment of this application is explained by taking the electronic device as a mobile phone as an example.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application in some embodiments.
  • the electronic device 100 includes a camera module 10, an image processor 20, a back cover 30, a frame 40 and a display screen (not shown in the figure).
  • the back cover 30 and the display screen are fixed on both sides of the frame 40 opposite to each other.
  • the back cover 30 , the display screen and the frame 40 together define an inner cavity of the electronic device 100 .
  • the display screen can be used to display images and can also integrate touch functions to achieve human-computer interaction.
  • the camera module 10 is housed in the inner cavity of the entire machine.
  • the camera module 10 is used to collect optical information from outside the electronic device 100 and form corresponding image signals.
  • the image processor 20 is communicatively connected with the camera module 10.
  • the image processor 20 is used to obtain image signals from the camera module 10 and process the image signals.
  • the communication connection between the camera module 10 and the image processor 20 may include data transmission through electrical connection methods such as wiring, or data transmission may be achieved through coupling or other methods. It can be understood that the camera module 10 and the image processor 20 can also achieve communication connection through other methods that can realize data transmission.
  • the back cover 30 may be provided with a camera hole 31, and the camera module 10 collects light through the camera hole 31.
  • the camera module 10 may be used as a rear camera of the electronic device 100.
  • the back cover 30 may include a light-transmitting lens installed on the camera hole 31 to allow light to pass through and be dust-proof and waterproof.
  • the camera module 10 can also be used as a front camera of the electronic device 100 .
  • the display screen can be provided with a light-transmitting area, and the camera module 10 can collect optical information outside the electronic device 100 through the light-transmitting area.
  • the camera module 10 is used as a front-facing camera of the electronic device 100 Mods. That is to say, the camera module 10 can be used as a front camera module of the electronic device 100 or as a rear camera module of the electronic device 100, which is not strictly limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 may be installed on the first end of the upper part of the electronic device 100 .
  • the first end and the second end of the upper part are respectively located at the left and right ends of the upper part.
  • the terms “upper”, “lower”, “left” and “right” used in this application are descriptions with reference to the orientation of the attached drawings, and do not indicate or imply what they refer to. Devices or elements must have a specific orientation, be constructed and operate in a specific orientation and therefore are not to be construed as limiting.
  • the installation position of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1A is only schematic, and this application does not strictly limit the installation position of the camera module 10 .
  • the camera module 10 can also be installed at other locations on the electronic device 100 .
  • the camera module 10 can be installed at the upper middle or the second end of the upper part of the electronic device 100 , or at the second end of the upper part of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also include a terminal body and an auxiliary component that can be rotated, moved or detached relative to the terminal body, and the camera module 10 may also be provided on the auxiliary component.
  • the electronic device 100 may also include an analog-to-digital converter (which may also be called an A/D converter, not shown in the figure).
  • the analog-to-digital converter is connected between the camera module 10 and the image processor 20 .
  • the analog-to-digital converter is used to convert the analog image signal generated by the camera module 10 into a digital image signal and transmit it to the image processor 20, and then process the digital image signal through the image processor 20 to obtain a processed image signal.
  • the image signal can be displayed as an image or image through the display screen.
  • the electronic device 100 may also include a memory (not shown in the figure).
  • the memory is communicatively connected to the image processor 20 .
  • the image processor 20 transmits the processed image signals to the memory for subsequent viewing.
  • the processed image signal can be retrieved from the memory at any time and displayed on the display screen.
  • the image processor 20 also compresses the processed image signal and then stores it in the memory to save memory space.
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the field of view FOV of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 1A in some application scenarios.
  • the camera module 10 may include a first lens (not shown) and a second lens (not shown).
  • the first lens can be used as the main camera lens.
  • the first lens corresponds to an optical zoom factor of 1x (ie, 1 times).
  • the second lens may be a telephoto lens, and the second lens is a 3x (ie, 3 times) optical zoom lens of the first lens, that is, the second lens corresponds to a 3x (ie, 3 times) optical zoom factor.
  • optical zoom is mainly achieved by switching lenses with different optical zoom factors in the camera module.
  • the optical zoom factor of the lens can indicate the optical zoom capability of the lens. The greater the optical zoom factor, the farther the scene can be photographed.
  • the second lens when the camera module 10 performs long-range shooting, the second lens can be used, and the field of view FOV of the second lens can be 40°. In this embodiment, the field of view angle of the second lens is less than 60°.
  • the first lens can be used, and the field of view of the first lens can be 80°. In this embodiment, the field of view angle of the first lens may be greater than 60° and less than 120°.
  • the second lens can also be used, and the field of view of the second lens can be 120°.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 1A in some embodiments.
  • the camera module 10 includes a telephoto lens 1 and a photosensitive element 2 .
  • the second lens of the camera module 10 may have the same structure as the telephoto lens 1.
  • the second lens of the camera module 10 may also have other structures, which is not covered by this application. limited.
  • the structure within the dotted line in Figure 2 is the schematic structure of the telephoto lens 1 in some embodiments.
  • the telephoto lens 1 in this application can also have other structures, and the drawings cannot be regarded as illustrating the structure of the telephoto lens 1. limited.
  • the photosensitive element 2 is located on the image side of the telephoto lens 1 .
  • the camera module 10 may also include a circuit board (not shown in the figure), and the photosensitive element 2 may be fixed on the circuit board.
  • Light can pass through the telephoto lens 1 and illuminate the photosensitive element 2 .
  • the working principle of the camera module 10 is: the light reflected by the photographed scene generates an optical image through the telephoto lens 1 and projects it to the photosensitive element 2.
  • the photosensitive element 2 converts the optical image into an electrical signal, that is, an analog image signal, and transmits it. to an analog-to-digital converter, so as to be converted into a digital image signal by the analog-to-digital converter and sent to the image processor 20 .
  • the photosensitive element 2 (also called an image sensor) is a semiconductor chip whose surface contains hundreds of thousands to millions of photodiodes, which generate charges when exposed to light.
  • the photosensitive element 2 can be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal oxide conductor device (CMOS).
  • CCD charge coupled device
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide conductor device
  • Charge-coupled devices are made of a highly sensitive semiconductor material that can convert light into charges. Charge-coupled devices are composed of many photosensitive units, usually measured in megapixels. When the surface of the charge coupling device is illuminated by light, each photosensitive unit will reflect the charge on the component. The signals generated by all the photosensitive units are added together to form a complete picture.
  • Complementary metal oxide conductor devices are mainly semiconductors made of the two elements silicon and germanium, so that N (charged with - charge) and P (charged with + charge) levels coexist on the complementary metal oxide conductor device.
  • N charged with - charge
  • P charged with + charge
  • the current generated by these two complementary effects can be recorded and interpreted into images by the processing chip.
  • the photosensitive element 2 can move on a plane perpendicular to the thickness direction of the camera module 10 or be tilted relative to the thickness direction of the camera module 10 to achieve anti-shake. At this time, the photosensitive element 2 does not have the ability to move in a direction parallel to the thickness of the camera module 10, or has a weak stroke that is much smaller than the focus stroke, so as to reduce the thickness of the module. In other embodiments, the photosensitive element 2 can also be a fixed component.
  • the telephoto lens 1 mainly uses the refraction principle of the lens to perform imaging, that is, the scene light passes through the telephoto lens 1 and forms a A clear image is formed on the image surface, and the image of the scene is recorded through the photosensitive element 2 located on the imaging surface.
  • the field of view FOV of the telephoto lens 1 is less than 60°.
  • the half field of view HFOV can satisfy: tan (HFOV) ⁇ 0.5, that is, the field of view FOV can be 53°, or the field of view FOV can also be 45°, 50°, 54°, etc.
  • the image height ImgH of the telephoto lens 1 is >2 mm, that is, the diagonal size of the photosensitive element of the telephoto lens 1 is greater than 4 mm.
  • the diagonal size of the photosensitive element of the telephoto lens 1 can be 5mm, 6mm or 8mm etc.
  • the telephoto lens 1 has a small field of view and a large panel size, so as to have strong long-range shooting capabilities and high imaging quality in long-range shooting.
  • the half angle of view HFOV is half of the maximum angle of view of the telephoto lens 1.
  • shooting when the object distance is greater than 100 meters can be regarded as long-range shooting, and shooting when the object distance is less than 10 centimeters can be regarded as close-up shooting.
  • the minimum focusing distance of telephoto lens 1 is less than 10 cm to enable macro shooting.
  • the telephoto lens 1 may be an upright lens or a periscope lens. This embodiment is described taking the telephoto lens 1 as an upright lens as an example.
  • the camera module 10 may also include a filter 3 .
  • the optical filter 3 can be located between the telephoto lens 1 and the photosensitive element 2 to filter out unwanted wavelength bands in the light and prevent the photosensitive element 2 from producing false colors or ripples, thereby improving its effective resolution and color reproduction.
  • the filter 3 may be an infrared filter.
  • the filter 3 is an independent component.
  • the structural component of the filter 3 can also be eliminated.
  • at least one optical element of the telephoto lens 1 is surface treated or Material processing to achieve light filtering. This application does not strictly limit the specific embodiments of the structural components or structures used to implement light filtering.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 2 in a stowed state.
  • FIG. 3B is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3A in a pop-up state.
  • the telephoto lens 1 can be moved to a stowed state; as shown in Figure 3B, the telephoto lens 1 can be moved to a pop-up state.
  • the first distance H1 between the telephoto lens 1 and the filter 3 is small.
  • the first distance H1 can be less than 1 mm, such as 0.1 mm, 0.5 mm, etc.
  • the overall height of the camera module 10 is smaller and occupies a smaller space in the inner cavity of the electronic device 100, which is convenient for storage and can be better applied to thin electronic devices. middle.
  • a first distance H1 is set between the telephoto lens 1 and the filter 3 to prevent the telephoto lens 1 and the filter 3 from being damaged due to collision or scratching when the telephoto lens 1 is in the stowed state, thus prolonging the The service life of the camera module 10.
  • the first distance H1 needs to take into account factors such as the focus stroke, lens support margin, and temperature effects.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 is in the stowed state, the telephoto lens 1 can also contact the filter 3, which is not limited in this application.
  • the second distance H2 between the telephoto lens 1 and the optical filter 3 is greater than the first distance H1 .
  • the telephoto lens 1 can be in a long-range shooting state and realize the focusing function.
  • the second distance H2 between the telephoto lens 1 and the optical filter 3 provides sufficient moving space for the telephoto lens 1, and the telephoto lens 1 can move relative to the photosensitive element 2 to achieve the focusing function.
  • the telephoto lens 1 may include multiple single lenses, such as five, six, seven, etc. Multiple single lenses are set at intervals.
  • the distance between the multiple single lenses of the telephoto lens 1 does not change. changes, that is, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged.
  • Figure 3C is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in Figure 3A in another pop-up state.
  • the camera module 10 shown in Figure 3B is in a long-range shooting mode.
  • the camera module shown in Figure 3C 10 is in close-up shooting mode.
  • the structures within the dotted lines in Figure 3B and Figure 3C are the schematic structures of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 of the telephoto lens 1 in some embodiments.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 in this application Lens group G2 may also have other structures structure, the drawings cannot be regarded as limiting the structure of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2.
  • the focal length of the telephoto lens 1 can also be changed to achieve switching between distant view and close view.
  • the telephoto lens 1 may include a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G2 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases.
  • the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 decreases. Therefore, during the focusing process of the telephoto lens 1 switching between distant view and close view, the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 changes.
  • the telephoto lens 1 can not only achieve long-distance shooting with high imaging quality, but also have strong close-range shooting capabilities. Achieve wide object distance imaging from distant views to close views.
  • the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases, thereby achieving higher close view imaging quality.
  • the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 may also be reduced, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first lens group G1 has positive power and the second lens group G2 has negative power, so that the height of the telephoto lens 1 is smaller than the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 to reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1, It is beneficial to miniaturization of the camera module 10 .
  • the telephoto lens 1 has a strong wide-object distance focusing capability, and can not only take long-range shots, but also close-up shots within 10 centimeters, with high imaging definition and high imaging quality.
  • the telephoto lens 1 also rationally configures the optical power of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 to make the telephoto lens 1 smaller in height, which is beneficial to the miniaturization of the camera module 10 .
  • the combined focal length of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 that is, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 may also be increased.
  • the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1, the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2, and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 satisfy: T1+T2 ⁇ EFL.
  • T1+T2 ⁇ EFL the sum of the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1 and the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2 is smaller, so that when the telephoto lens 1 is in the stowed state, the overall height of the camera module 10 is smaller , and occupies a smaller space in the inner cavity of the electronic device 100, which is convenient for storage and can be better applied to thin electronic devices.
  • the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1, the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2, and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 can also satisfy: T1+T2 ⁇ 0.6EFL, or, 0.6EFL ⁇ T1+T2 ⁇ 0.8EFL , or,0.8EFL ⁇ T1+T2 ⁇ EFL.
  • the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1 is the distance between the object side and the image side of the first lens group G1
  • the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2 is the distance between the object side and the image side of the second lens group G2. the distance between.
  • the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 satisfy: 0.1 ⁇ T1/F1 ⁇ 1.
  • the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length F of the first lens group G1 1 can also satisfy: 0.1 ⁇ T1/F1 ⁇ 0.3, or, 0.3 ⁇ T1/F1 ⁇ 1.
  • the thickness of the first lens group G1 is smaller, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitating storage; and facilitating the movement of the first lens group G1 , improve imaging quality.
  • the multiple lenses of the first lens group G1 can be installed on the first lens barrel (not shown), and the multiple lenses of the second lens group G2 can be installed on the second lens barrel (not shown). That is: the multiple lenses of the first lens group G1 and the multiple lenses of the second lens group G2 can be installed on two lens barrels respectively, and the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 can be measured separately. get.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2, and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 can be measured respectively by a focal length measuring instrument.
  • the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2 and the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 satisfy: -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1.
  • -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1 it is beneficial to make the second lens group G2 have a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitating storage; and facilitating the second lens group G2 Group G2 is moved to improve imaging quality.
  • the above-mentioned limitation on the ratio range of the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, as well as the ratio of the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2 and the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 Scope limitations can exist independently of each other or can be combined with each other.
  • the telephoto lens 1 can obtain a smaller height, better focusing capability and imaging quality.
  • a single group focusing method can be used to simplify the movement of the focusing structure and simplify the focusing method.
  • the first lens group G1 does not move, and the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O, To increase the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2.
  • the first lens group G1 does not move, and by moving the second lens group G2 to focus, the movement mode of the focusing structure of the telephoto lens 1 can be simplified, thereby simplifying the focusing method.
  • the distance between the first lens group G1 and the photosensitive element 2 remains unchanged, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 decreases.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged, and the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged.
  • the distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis O, and the second lens group G2 does not move, so as to increase the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2.
  • the first lens group G1 is located on the object side of the second lens group G2, which increases the movable optical path space, which is beneficial to reducing the light turning angle, reducing aberrations, and improving imaging quality.
  • the second lens group G2 does not move, and by moving the first lens group G1 to focus, the movement mode of the focusing structure of the telephoto lens 1 can be simplified, thereby simplifying the focusing method.
  • the distance between the first lens group G1 and the photosensitive element 2 increases, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 remains unchanged.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 increases, and the third The distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged.
  • a dual group focusing method can be used to reduce the respective focusing strokes of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2, and can also improve the movement accuracy of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2. , improve the focusing ability of telephoto lens 1.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can be moved along the optical axis O, as long as the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 is ensured to increase.
  • both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can move, thereby reducing the respective focusing strokes of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2, and also improving the focusing distance between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2.
  • the movement accuracy of the second lens group G2 improves the focusing capability of the telephoto lens 1.
  • both lens groups can be moved, which further increases the movable optical path space, which is more conducive to reducing the light turning angle and reducing the aberrations and further improve image quality.
  • the distances between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 change.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distances between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface change.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 may move relative to the photosensitive element 2 in the following manner: the distance between the first lens group G1 and the photosensitive element 2 increases, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 increases. The distance between 2 decreases.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 increases, and the third The distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 may move relative to the photosensitive element 2 in such a way that the distance between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 increases. Large, that is, the distances between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 are increased, which is not limited in this application.
  • the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 satisfy: H3 ⁇ EFL, so that the telephoto lens 1 can achieve wide object distance shooting.
  • the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 can satisfy: H3 ⁇ 0.9EFL or 0.05 mm ⁇ H3 ⁇ 0.9EFL.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is smaller.
  • the light gathering ability is strong and can be used for close-up shooting within 10 centimeters.
  • the camera module 10 may also include a first driving mechanism (not shown).
  • the first driving mechanism is connected to the telephoto lens 1 and is used to control the telephoto lens 1 to move in a direction closer to or away from the photosensitive element 2 , to realize the storage and ejection of the telephoto lens 1, and also to realize the long-range focusing of the telephoto lens 1.
  • This application can realize auto focus (AF) through the first driving mechanism.
  • the first driving mechanism may use a focus motor, such as a voice coil motor (VCM), a memory metal (shape memory alloy) motor, a ceramic motor (piezo motor), a stepper motor (stepper motor), etc.
  • the first driving mechanism may also be a spring or other mechanism capable of elastic deformation.
  • a focus motor such as a voice coil motor (VCM), a memory metal (shape memory alloy) motor, a ceramic motor (piezo motor), a stepper motor (stepper motor), etc.
  • the first driving mechanism may also be a spring or other mechanism capable of elastic deformation.
  • the spring When the telephoto lens 1 is in the pop-up state, the spring does not elastically deform or has small elastic deformation, and is in a natural state; when the telephoto lens 1 is in the stowed state. , the spring undergoes elastic deformation or the elastic deformation increases and is in a compressed state.
  • the elastic deformation of the spring decreases or the spring returns to its natural state, thereby generating an elastic force.
  • the telephoto lens 1 is driven from the stored state by the elastic force of the spring. pop up.
  • the first driving mechanism may also adopt other structures, which is not limited in this application.
  • the camera module 10 may also include a second driving mechanism (not shown).
  • the second driving mechanism is connected to the first lens group G1 and is used to control the movement of the first lens group G1 along the optical axis O to change the The distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 enables the telephoto lens 1 to switch between the distant view mode and the close-up mode.
  • the second driving mechanism may use a focus motor, such as a voice coil motor, a memory metal motor, a ceramic motor, a stepper motor, etc.
  • the second driving mechanism may also adopt other structures, which is not limited in this application.
  • the camera module 10 may also include a third driving mechanism (not shown).
  • the third driving mechanism is connected to the second lens group G2 and is used to control the movement of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis O to change the The distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 enables the telephoto lens 1 to switch between the distant view mode and the close-up mode.
  • the third driving mechanism may use a focus motor, such as a voice coil motor, a memory metal motor, a ceramic motor, a stepper motor, etc.
  • the third driving mechanism may also adopt other structures, which is not limited in this application.
  • the camera module 10 may also include a second driving mechanism and a third driving mechanism.
  • the second driving mechanism is connected to the first lens group G1 and is used to control the movement of the first lens group G1 along the optical axis O.
  • the third driving mechanism The driving mechanism is connected to the second lens group G2 and is used to control the movement of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis O to change the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2, so as to realize the telephoto lens 1 in the distant view. Switch between mode and close-up mode.
  • two driving mechanisms drive the movement of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively, which can reduce the respective focusing strokes of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2, and can also improve the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2.
  • the movement accuracy of the lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 improves the focusing capability of the telephoto lens 1.
  • the second driving mechanism may use a focus motor, such as a voice coil motor, a memory metal motor, a ceramic motor, a stepper motor, etc.
  • the third driving mechanism may use a focus motor, such as a voice coil motor, a memory metal motor, a ceramic motor, a stepper motor, etc.
  • the second driving mechanism and/or the third driving mechanism may also adopt other structures, which is not limited in this application.
  • the structures of the second driving mechanism and the third driving mechanism may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
  • the camera module 10 may further include a first driving mechanism and a second driving mechanism and/or a third driving mechanism.
  • the first driving mechanism is connected to the telephoto lens 1 and is used to control the telephoto lens 1 to move in the direction closer to or away from the photosensitive element 2 to realize the storage and ejection of the telephoto lens 1. It can also realize the storage and ejection of the telephoto lens 1. Distant focus.
  • the second driving mechanism is connected to the first lens group G1 and is used to control the movement of the first lens group G1 along the optical axis O.
  • the third driving mechanism is connected to the second lens group G2 and is used to control the second lens group G2 to move along the optical axis O. Move to change the distance H3 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 to achieve switching of the telephoto lens 1 between the distant view mode and the close-up mode.
  • the first driving mechanism may use a focus motor, such as a voice coil motor, a memory metal motor, a ceramic motor, a stepper motor, etc.
  • the second driving mechanism may use a focus motor, such as a voice coil motor, a memory metal motor, a ceramic motor, a stepper motor, etc.
  • the third driving mechanism may use a focus motor, such as a voice coil motor, a memory metal motor, a ceramic motor, a stepper motor, etc.
  • one, two or three of the first driving mechanism, the second driving mechanism and the third driving mechanism may also adopt other structures, which is not limited in this application.
  • the structures of the first driving mechanism, the second driving mechanism and the third driving mechanism may be the same, and the structure of at least one of the first driving mechanism, the second driving mechanism and the third driving mechanism may also be different from that of other driving mechanisms.
  • the structure of the organization is different, and this application does not limit this.
  • the camera module 10 may also include an anti-shake motor (not shown).
  • the anti-shake motor is used to drive the telephoto lens 1 to move in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis O, or to tilt relative to the optical axis O.
  • Anti-shake motors can be shape memory alloy motors, suspension wire motors, ball motors, etc.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 satisfy: F1 ⁇ EFL.
  • F1 ⁇ EFL the focal length of the first lens group G1 is smaller and the ability to gather light is stronger, allowing the telephoto lens 1 to be used for close-up shooting within 10 centimeters.
  • the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power, that is, the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 is greater than 0.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 can also satisfy: F1 ⁇ 0.9EFL, then the focal length of the first lens group G1 is smaller and its ability to gather light is smaller.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 can also satisfy: 0.9EFL ⁇ F1 ⁇ EFL, which is not limited in this application.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 is smaller than the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1
  • the second lens group G2 with negative refractive power can extend the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 so that the first lens group G1
  • the combined focal length with the second lens group G2, that is, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is greater than the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 can satisfy: -EFL ⁇ F2.
  • the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power, that is, the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 is less than 0.
  • the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2 can be reduced, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and making the second lens group G2 smaller in focal length and less capable of gathering light. Stronger, easier to focus and reduce the motor stroke.
  • the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2 is small, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1 and is beneficial to miniaturization of the camera module 10 .
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 can also satisfy: F2 ⁇ -EFL, which is not limited in this application.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 can satisfy: 1 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 9, so as to improve the focusing capability and imaging quality of the telephoto lens 1.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 can satisfy: 1 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 3, or, 3 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 9, or, 1.1 ⁇ (F1-F2)/F1 ⁇ 9.
  • the telephoto lens 1 will improve the light gathering ability, which is beneficial to achieving close-range imaging; but it will increase the degree of light deflection of the telephoto lens 1, increase aberrations, the imaging may not be clear, and the imaging quality will be poor.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 is larger and is significantly different from the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, that is, the value of (F1-F2)/F1 is larger, the light concentration of the telephoto lens 1 will be reduced.
  • the focal lengths of the two lens groups can be designed according to the needs of actual application scenarios.
  • the limits on the ratio range of the effective focal length EFL of the focal lens 1 may exist independently of each other or may be combined with each other. When the above three ratio ranges are combined with each other, the telephoto lens 1 can obtain smaller size, better focusing capability and imaging quality.
  • the first lens group G1 includes at least two lenses to improve the specifications of the telephoto lens 1 and improve imaging quality.
  • the first lens group G1 may include two to four lenses, such as three lenses, four lenses, etc.
  • the first lens group G1 includes at least one lens with positive optical power.
  • the second lens group G2 may also include multiple lenses to improve the specifications of the telephoto lens 1 and improve imaging quality.
  • the second lens group G2 may include two to four lenses.
  • the second lens group G2 may also include one lens, which is not limited in this application.
  • the second lens group G2 includes at least one lens with negative refractive power.
  • the telephoto lens 1 may include four to eight lenses, such as five lenses, six lenses, seven lenses, etc.
  • the telephoto lens 1 will have high specifications and high imaging quality, but it will also increase the number of lenses in the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2.
  • the design difficulty of each lens in the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 is small; the design difficulty of each lens in the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 is low, but the telephoto lens 1 has low specifications and poor imaging quality. You can choose different number of lenses according to different needs.
  • the first lens group G1 may include a first lens L11 and a second lens L12 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the Abbe number of the first lens L11 and the second lens L12 are The sum of the Abbe numbers of the lens L12 can be greater than 20, which is beneficial to the correction of chromatic aberration of the telephoto lens 1 .
  • the sum of the Abbe numbers of the lenses of the second lens group G2 can be greater than 18, which is beneficial to the telephoto lens 1 Chromatic aberration correction.
  • the second lens group G2 may include a first lens L21 close to the object side.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 can satisfy: f11/F1 ⁇ 1; and the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2 and the second lens group G2
  • the focal length F2 can satisfy: f21/F2 ⁇ 1.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 may also satisfy: 0.5 ⁇ f11/F1 ⁇ 1.
  • the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1 is generally used as the main lens, and other lenses are added to obtain the lens group, so that the first lens L11 is adjusted through other lenses, so that the first lens group G1 achieves the desired optical performance.
  • 0.5 ⁇ f11/F1 ⁇ 1 the difference between the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 is small, which facilitates the adjustment of the focal length f11 of the first lens L11. , to obtain the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length F2 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2 and the second lens group G2 may also satisfy: 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1.
  • the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2 is generally used as the main lens, and other lenses are added to obtain the lens group, so that the second lens L21 is adjusted through other lenses, so that the second lens group G2 achieves the desired optical performance.
  • 0.2 ⁇ f21/F1 ⁇ 1 the difference between the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2 and the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2 is small, which facilitates the adjustment of the focal length f21 of the first lens L21. , to obtain the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2.
  • the multiple lenses of the first lens group G1 may be made of the same material, such as glass, resin, etc.
  • glass has high refractive index and low expansion characteristics, so that the telephoto lens 1 has better imaging quality and low-temperature drift characteristics.
  • the density of the resin is low, which can reduce the weight of the lens group, facilitate movement, and improve the focusing ability of the telephoto lens 1.
  • at least one lens among the multiple lenses of the first lens group G1 may be made of a material different from other lenses, which is not limited in this application.
  • one lens among the multiple lenses of the first lens group G1 can be made of glass.
  • the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1 can be made of glass, and the other lenses can be made of resin, thereby ensuring that the telephoto lens can be 1's imaging quality and low-temperature drift characteristics can also reduce the weight of the lens group and improve the focusing ability of the telephoto lens 1.
  • the multiple lenses of the first lens group G1 can be processed and formed using processes such as injection molding, molding, and/or polishing and grinding.
  • the multiple lenses of the second lens group G2 may be made of the same material, such as glass, resin, etc.
  • at least one lens among the multiple lenses of the second lens group G2 may be made of a material different from other lenses, which is not limited in this application.
  • one lens among the multiple lenses of the second lens group G2 can also be made of glass.
  • the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2 can be made of glass, and the other lenses can be made of resin, thereby ensuring long focal length.
  • the imaging quality and low-temperature drift characteristics of lens 1 can also reduce the weight of the lens group and improve the focusing ability of telephoto lens 1.
  • the multiple lenses of the second lens group G2 can be processed and formed using processes such as injection molding, molding, and/or polishing and grinding.
  • the telephoto lens 1 may further include an aperture stop 4 , and the aperture stop 4 may be installed on the first lens group G1 .
  • the aperture adjustment effect of the aperture diaphragm 4 is better, which can improve the imaging quality of the telephoto lens 1 .
  • the aperture diaphragm 4 may be installed at an end of the first lens group G1 close to the object side.
  • the aperture diaphragm 4 is installed on the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1 as an example for illustration.
  • the aperture diaphragm 4 may also be It can be installed on other lenses of the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, or other positions of the telephoto lens 1. This is not strictly limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the aperture stop 4 can be a spacer ring structure or a variable fan blade structure; or the aperture stop 4 can be realized through a surface spraying process, for example, the aperture stop 4 is formed by spraying light-shielding material on the lens.
  • the position of the aperture diaphragm 4 may be fixed or variable.
  • the position of the aperture diaphragm 4 is variable, and the position of the aperture diaphragm 4 can be adjusted according to the focus situation to be located between different lenses.
  • the optical surface of at least one lens of the telephoto lens 1 is aspherical.
  • the aspherical shaped optical surface has different optical powers from the paraxial to the outer field of view area, so that the imaging picture has a more balanced image. quality.
  • the optical surface of at least one lens of the telephoto lens 1 may be a free-form surface to correct aberrations.
  • the aspheric surface is a surface that is rotationally symmetric around the optical axis O; the free-form surface can have no axis of symmetry, or can be symmetrical along a certain direction, or symmetrical along certain two directions.
  • multiple lenses of the telephoto lens 1 are assembled through an active alignment (AA) process to ensure assembly accuracy.
  • AA active alignment
  • the optical surface of at least one lens of the telephoto lens 1 may form a diffraction grating structure.
  • chromatic aberration can be reduced and the volume of the telephoto lens 1 can also be reduced.
  • the telephoto lens 1 may also include a liquid lens (not shown), and the liquid lens may be located between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2.
  • the focusing effect can be enhanced through a liquid lens to achieve ultra-close-up shooting.
  • a liquid lens is a structural component that uses liquid as a lens and changes the focal length by changing the curvature of the liquid.
  • At least one lens of the telephoto lens 1 can use special-shaped technology to reduce the size of the telephoto lens 1 so that the telephoto lens 1 can be better adapted to the miniaturized electronic device 100 and increase the telephoto lens 100 1 scope of application. Cutouts can be achieved through the I-CUT process. In addition, since the height of the lens is reduced through the incision, the lens can be set with a larger light aperture, thereby increasing the amount of light transmitted by the telephoto lens 1 and making the imaging quality of the telephoto lens 1 better.
  • special-shaped technology can also be used on the structural supports of the lens such as the lens barrel and spacer to reduce the size of the telephoto lens 1 .
  • the peripheral surface or supporting surface of at least one lens of the telephoto lens 1 can be blackened or roughened to eliminate stray light and improve imaging quality.
  • the blackening treatment can be coating or plating with black ink and other matting materials, or it can be a film. Roughening is mainly used to increase roughness.
  • the telephoto lens 1 can also eliminate stray light in other ways, which is not strictly limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • this application provides eight possible embodiments of the camera module 10 .
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes seven lenses. If the number of lenses is larger, the telephoto lens 1 will have high specifications and high imaging quality.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes three lenses.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes four lenses.
  • the first lens L1 closest to the object side among the three lenses of the first lens group G1 is the main lens, and the second lens L2 and the third lens among the three lenses of the first lens group G1
  • the three lenses L3 are used to adjust parameters such as the focal length of the first lens L1 so that the first lens group G1 obtains preset optical performance.
  • the first lens group G1 adjusts the main lens through two lenses.
  • the optical path is simple, the design difficulty of each lens is low, and the thickness of the adjusted lens is large, which is beneficial to processing; in addition, the thickness of the first lens group G1 The TI is smaller, and the height of the telephoto lens 1 is smaller, making it easier to store.
  • focusing is performed by moving the first lens group G1 and fixing the second lens group G2, so that when focusing on a close-up view, the object side of the telephoto lens 1 is closer to the subject. , the degree of deflection of light is small, reducing aberrations and improving imaging quality.
  • focusing is performed by moving the second lens group G2 and fixing the first lens group G1.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes six lenses, and the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes three lenses.
  • focusing is performed by moving the first lens group G1 and fixing the second lens group G2.
  • focusing is performed by moving the second lens group G2 and fixing the first lens group G1.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes five lenses, and the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes three lenses.
  • focusing is performed by moving the first lens group G1 and fixing the second lens group G2.
  • focusing is performed by moving the second lens group G2 and fixing the first lens group G1.
  • FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module 10 when focusing on a distant view in the first embodiment provided by this application.
  • FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 4A when focusing on a 50 mm lens. Schematic diagram of light path in close-up view.
  • the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 4A includes most of the technical features of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3B . The differences between the two are mainly described below, and most of the same contents between the two will not be described again.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes seven lenses.
  • the first lens group G1 includes three lenses. Focusing is performed by moving the first lens group G1 and fixing the second lens group G2.
  • the camera module 10 includes a telephoto lens 1, a filter 3 and a photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens group G1 and a second lens arranged along the object side to the image side. Group G2, the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 have positive refractive power.
  • the distance H3 between the groups G2 changes.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 are arranged side by side.
  • the light passes through the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 in sequence, and then is filtered. Chip 3, and finally reaches the photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes seven lenses. If the number of lenses is larger, the telephoto lens 1 will have high specifications and high image quality.
  • the first lens L1 closest to the object side among the three lenses of the first lens group G1 is the main lens, and the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 among the three lenses of the first lens group G1 are used to Parameters such as the focal length of lens L1 are adjusted so that the first lens group G1 obtains preset optical performance.
  • the first lens group G1 adjusts the main lens through two lenses, the optical path is simple, the design difficulty of each lens is low, and the thickness of the adjusted lens is large, which is conducive to processing; in addition, the third The thickness TI of the first lens group G1 is small, and the height of the telephoto lens 1 is small, making it easy to store.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a distant view, the light reflected by the distant object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, and the camera module 10 can capture the distant view image.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis O.
  • the light reflected by the close-up object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on On the photosensitive element 2, the camera module 10 can capture close-up images.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 increases, and the third The distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged.
  • focusing is performed by moving the first lens group G1 and fixing the second lens group G2, so that when focusing on a close-up view, the object side of the telephoto lens 1 is closer to the subject, and the light is less sensitive to light.
  • the degree of deflection is small, reducing the image Poor, improve image quality.
  • the following combines data and simulation results to present a specific solution of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 4A in a possible embodiment.
  • Table 1a is the curvature radius, thickness, and refractive index of each lens and filter 3 when the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 4A focuses on a distant view in a possible embodiment.
  • Nd Abbe number.
  • the thickness includes the thickness of the lens itself and the distance between the lenses.
  • the virtual surface is an imaginary surface located between the filter 3 and the photosensitive element 2, and is used to examine whether the light spots converge.
  • Table 1b shows the aspherical coefficients of each lens in a possible embodiment of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 4A.
  • the aspheric surface of the telephoto lens 1 in Table 1a can be defined by, but is not limited to, the following aspheric surface curve equation:
  • z is the relative distance between a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis and the plane tangent to the intersection point on the aspheric optical axis; r is the perpendicular distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis; c is the curvature; K is the cone coefficient; ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient, please refer to Table 1b.
  • Table 1c and Table 1d are basic parameters of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 4A in a possible embodiment.
  • f1 to f7 in Table 1c are the focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the seventh lens L7 respectively
  • F1 and F2 in Table 1d are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively
  • T1 and T2 are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 switches from a distant view to a close view, for example, it switches to focus on a close view of 50 mm, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side, and the space between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the distance (S6) is increased by 2mm, that is, the focusing stroke of the first lens group G1 moving to the object side is 2mm.
  • the focusing stroke is significantly shortened and the focusing ability is strong.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 14.6mm; when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 12.3mm.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side, and the distance (S6) between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases by 2 mm.
  • the distance (S14) between the second lens group G2 and the filter 3 remains unchanged, so that a single group focusing method can be used to simplify the focusing method.
  • the height of the telephoto lens 1 is increased.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 is smaller and has a strong ability to gather light, which is beneficial to Achieve close-up shooting within 10 cm.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group is smaller and has a stronger ability to gather light, making it easier to focus and shorten the motor stroke.
  • (F1-F2)/F1 is approximately equal to 3, then the focal length difference between the two lens groups is small, which can improve the light gathering ability of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate close-up imaging; and the focal length of the second lens group G2 F2 is larger, which can reduce the deflection of light by the telephoto lens 1, reduce aberrations, and improve imaging quality.
  • the focal length f1 of the first lens L1 is the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 has a small difference with the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 to obtain the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f4 of the fourth lens L4 is the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2. 0.2 ⁇ f4/F2 ⁇ 1, that is, 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1, so that the second lens group G2
  • the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 has a small difference with the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 to obtain the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2.
  • the thickness of the first lens group G1 is smaller, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate storage; it facilitates the movement of the first lens group G1 and improves imaging quality.
  • -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1 is conducive to making the second lens group G2 have a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group G2, improving Imaging quality.
  • Figure 4C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 4A when focusing on a distant view.
  • Figure 4D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 4B when focusing on a 50 mm close-up view. Simulation renderings.
  • FIG. 4C and FIG. 4D both include the axial chromatic aberration curve, astigmatism field curve diagram and distortion diagram of the telephoto lens 1 .
  • the axial chromatic aberration curve includes spherical aberration curves corresponding to different wavebands of the system (the diagram includes 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm); its physical meaning is that the light of the corresponding wavelength emitted in the 0-degree field of view passes through After the optical system, the deviation relative to the ideal image point; its abscissa is the deviation value along the optical axis, and the ordinate is the normalized coordinate at the pupil.
  • the values shown in Figure 4C and Figure 4D are both small.
  • the astigmatism field curve diagram is used to illustrate the deviation of the convergence point of thin beams in different fields of view from the ideal imaging plane. field of view.
  • a certain field of view value is too large, the image quality of the field of view is poor or there are advanced aberrations.
  • the curvature of field in both directions is small, and the system has a good depth of focus.
  • the distortion diagram is used to characterize the relative deviation between the beam convergence point (actual image height) and the ideal image height in different fields of view. The distortion shown in Figure 4C and Figure 4D is small, ensuring that there is no obvious distortion of the picture.
  • Figure 5A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module 10 focuses on a distant view in the second embodiment provided by the present application.
  • Figure 5B is a schematic diagram of the camera module 10 shown in Figure 5A when it focuses on a 50 mm lens. Schematic diagram of light path in close-up view.
  • the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 5A includes most of the technical features of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3B . The differences between the two are mainly described below, and most of the same contents between the two will not be described again.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes seven lenses, and in addition, the first lens group G1 also includes three lenses. Different from the first embodiment, focusing is performed by moving the second lens group G2 and fixing the first lens group G1.
  • the camera module 10 includes a telephoto lens 1, a filter 3 and a photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens group G1 and a second lens arranged along the object side to the image side. Group G2, the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 have positive refractive power.
  • the distance H3 between the groups G2 changes.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 are arranged side by side.
  • the light passes through the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 in sequence, and then is filtered Chip 3, and finally reaches the photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes seven lenses. If the number of lenses is larger, the telephoto lens 1 will have high specifications and high image quality.
  • the first lens L1 closest to the object side among the three lenses of the first lens group G1 is the main lens, and the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 among the three lenses of the first lens group G1 are used to Parameters such as the focal length of lens L1 are adjusted so that the first lens group G1 obtains preset optical performance.
  • the first lens group G1 adjusts the main lens through two lenses, the optical path is simple, the design difficulty of each lens is low, and the thickness TI of the first lens group G1 is small, and the height of the telephoto lens 1 Smaller for easy storage.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a distant view, the light reflected by the distant object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, and the camera module 10 can capture the distant view image.
  • the second lens group G2 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on the close-up view, the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O.
  • the light reflected by the close-up object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on On the photosensitive element 2, the camera module 10 can capture close-up images.
  • the first lens group G1 does not move
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O
  • the first lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O.
  • the distance H3 between G1 and the second lens group G2 increases, and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the distance between the first lens group G1 and the photosensitive element 2 remains unchanged, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 decreases.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged. distance decreases.
  • the following combines data and simulation results to present a specific solution of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 5A in a possible embodiment.
  • Table 2a is the curvature radius, thickness, and refractive index of each lens and filter 3 when the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 5A focuses on a distant view in a possible embodiment.
  • Nd Abbe number.
  • the thickness includes the thickness of the lens itself and the distance between the lenses.
  • the virtual surface is an imaginary surface located between the filter 3 and the photosensitive element 2, and is used to examine whether the light spots converge.
  • Table 2b shows the aspherical coefficients of each lens in a possible embodiment of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 5A.
  • the aspheric surface of the telephoto lens 1 in Table 2a can be defined by, but is not limited to, the following aspheric surface curve equation:
  • z is the relative distance between a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis and the plane tangent to the intersection point on the aspheric optical axis; r is the perpendicular distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis; c is the curvature; K is the cone coefficient; ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient, please refer to Table 2b.
  • Table 2c and Table 2d are basic parameters of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 5A in a possible embodiment.
  • f1 to f7 in Table 2c are the focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the seventh lens L7 respectively
  • F1 and F2 in Table 2d are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively
  • T1 and T2 are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively.
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side, and the space between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the distance (S6) is increased by 2.3mm, that is, the focusing stroke of the second lens group G2 moving to the image side is 2.3mm.
  • the focusing stroke is significantly shortened and the focusing ability is strong.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 14.75mm; when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 10.5mm.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side, and the distance (S6) between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases by 2.3 mm.
  • the distance ( S14 ) between the second lens group G2 and the filter 3 is reduced by 2.3 mm to keep the height of the telephoto lens 1 unchanged.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 is smaller and has a strong ability to gather light, which is beneficial to Achieve close-up shooting within 10 cm.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group is smaller and has a stronger ability to gather light, making it easier to focus and shorten the motor stroke.
  • the focal length difference of the two lens groups is small, which can improve the light gathering ability of telephoto lens 1 and facilitate close-up imaging; and the focal length of the second lens group G2 is F2 Larger, thereby reducing the degree of light deflection of the telephoto lens 1, reducing aberrations, and improving imaging quality.
  • the focal length f1 of the first lens L1 is the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 has a small difference with the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 to obtain the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f4 of the fourth lens L4 is the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2. 0.2 ⁇ f4/F2 ⁇ 1, that is, 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1, so that the second lens group G2
  • the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 has a small difference with the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 to obtain the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2.
  • the thickness of the first lens group G1 is smaller, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate storage; it facilitates the movement of the first lens group G1 and improves imaging quality.
  • -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1 is conducive to making the second lens group G2 have a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group G2, improving Imaging quality.
  • Figure 5C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 5A when focusing on a distant view.
  • Figure 5D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 5B when focusing on a 50 mm close-up view. Simulation renderings.
  • FIG. 5C and FIG. 5D both include the axial chromatic aberration curve, astigmatism field curve diagram and distortion diagram of the telephoto lens 1 .
  • the axial chromatic aberration curve includes spherical aberration curves corresponding to different wavebands of the system (the diagram includes 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm); its physical meaning is that the light of the corresponding wavelength emitted in the 0-degree field of view passes through After the optical system, the deviation relative to the ideal image point; its abscissa is the deviation value along the optical axis, and the ordinate is the normalized coordinate at the pupil.
  • the values shown in Figure 5C and Figure 5D are both small.
  • the astigmatism field curve diagram is used to illustrate the deviation of the convergence point of thin beams in different fields of view from the ideal imaging plane. field of view.
  • a certain field of view value is too large, the image quality of the field of view is poor or there are advanced aberrations.
  • the curvature of field in both directions is small, and the system has a good depth of focus.
  • the distortion diagram is used to characterize the relative deviation between the beam convergence point (actual image height) and the ideal image height in different fields of view. The distortion shown in Figure 5C and Figure 5D is small, ensuring that there is no obvious distortion of the picture.
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module 10 when focusing on a distant view in the third embodiment provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 6A when focusing on a 50 mm lens. Schematic diagram of light path in close-up view.
  • the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 6A includes most of the technical features of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3B . The differences between the two are mainly described below, and most of the same contents between the two will not be described again.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes seven lenses, and focuses by moving the first lens group G1 and fixing the second lens group G2.
  • the first lens group G1 includes four lenses.
  • the camera module 10 includes a telephoto lens 1, a filter 3 and a photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens group G1 and a second lens arranged along the object side to the image side. Group G2, the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 have positive refractive power.
  • the distance H3 between the groups G2 changes.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3 and a fourth lens L4 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 It includes a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6 and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the light passes through the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 in sequence, and then is filtered Chip 3, and finally reaches the photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a distant view, the light reflected by the distant object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2 , and the camera module 10 can capture the distant view image.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis O.
  • the light reflected by the close-up object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on On the photosensitive element 2, the camera module 10 can capture close-up images.
  • the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis O
  • the second lens group G2 does not move
  • the distance H3 between G1 and the second lens group G2 increases, and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the distance between the first lens group G1 and the photosensitive element 2 increases, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 remains unchanged.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 increases, and the third The distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged.
  • the following combines data and simulation results to present a specific solution of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 6A in a possible embodiment.
  • Table 3a shows the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 6A in a possible embodiment.
  • the thickness includes the thickness of the lens itself and the distance between the lenses.
  • the virtual surface is an imaginary surface located between the filter 3 and the photosensitive element 2, and is used to examine whether the light spots converge.
  • Table 3b shows the aspherical coefficients of each lens in a possible embodiment of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 6A.
  • the aspheric surface of the telephoto lens 1 in Table 3a can be defined by, but is not limited to, the following aspheric surface curve equation:
  • z is the relative distance between a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis and the plane tangent to the intersection point on the aspheric optical axis; r is the perpendicular distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis; c is the curvature; K is the cone coefficient; ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient, please refer to Table 3b.
  • Table 3c and Table 3d are the basic parameters of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 6A in a possible embodiment.
  • f1 to f7 in Table 3c are the focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the seventh lens L7 respectively
  • F1 and F2 in Table 3d are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively
  • T1 and T2 are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 switches from a distant view to a close view, for example, it switches to focus on a close view of 50 mm, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side, and the space between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the distance (S8) is increased by 2mm, that is, the focusing stroke of the first lens group G1 moving to the object side is 2mm.
  • the focusing stroke is significantly shortened and the focusing ability is strong.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 14.55mm; when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 12.2mm.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side, and the distance (S8) between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases by 2 mm.
  • the distance (S14) between the second lens group G2 and the filter 3 remains unchanged, so that a single group focusing method can be used to simplify the focusing method.
  • the height of the telephoto lens 1 is increased.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group is smaller and has a stronger ability to gather light, making it easier to focus and shorten the motor stroke.
  • (F1-F2)/F1 is approximately equal to 3, then the focal length difference between the two lens groups is small, which can improve the light gathering ability of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate close-up imaging; and the focal length of the second lens group G2 F2 is larger, which can reduce the deflection of light by the telephoto lens 1, reduce aberrations, and improve imaging quality.
  • the focal length f1 of the first lens L1 is the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 has a small difference with the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 to obtain the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f5 of the fifth lens L5 is the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2. 0.2 ⁇ f5/F2 ⁇ 1, that is, 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1, so that the second lens group G2
  • the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 has a small difference with the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 to obtain the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2.
  • the thickness of the first lens group G1 is smaller, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate storage; it facilitates the movement of the first lens group G1 and improves imaging quality.
  • -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1 is conducive to making the second lens group G2 have a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group G2, improving Imaging quality.
  • Figure 6C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 6A when focusing on a distant view.
  • Figure 6D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 6B when focusing on a 50 mm close-up view. Simulation renderings.
  • FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D both include the axial chromatic aberration curve, astigmatism field curve diagram and distortion diagram of the telephoto lens 1.
  • the axial chromatic aberration curve includes spherical aberration curves corresponding to different wavebands of the system (the diagram includes 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm); its physical meaning is that the light of the corresponding wavelength emitted in the 0-degree field of view passes through After the optical system, the deviation relative to the ideal image point; its abscissa is the deviation value along the optical axis, and the ordinate is the normalized coordinate at the pupil.
  • the values shown in Figure 6C and Figure 6D are both small.
  • the astigmatism field curve diagram is used to illustrate the deviation of the convergence point of thin beams in different fields of view from the ideal imaging plane. field of view.
  • a certain field of view value is too large, the image quality of the field of view is poor or there are advanced aberrations.
  • the curvature of field in both directions is small, and the system has a good depth of focus.
  • the distortion diagram is used to characterize the relative deviation between the beam convergence point (actual image height) and the ideal image height in different fields of view. The distortion shown in Figure 6C and Figure 6D is small, which ensures that there is no obvious distortion of the picture.
  • FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module 10 when focusing on a distant view in the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 7A when focusing on a 50 mm lens. Schematic diagram of light path in close-up view.
  • the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 7A includes most of the technical features of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3B . The differences between the two are mainly described below, and most of the same contents between the two will not be described again.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes seven lenses.
  • the first lens group G1 includes four lenses, and focusing is performed by moving the second lens group G2 and fixing the first lens group G1.
  • the camera module 10 includes a telephoto lens 1, a filter 3 and a photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens group G1 and a second lens arranged along the object side to the image side. Group G2, the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 have positive refractive power.
  • the distance H3 between the groups G2 changes.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3 and a fourth lens L4 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 It includes a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6 and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the light passes through the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5, the sixth lens L6 and the seventh lens L7 in sequence, and then is filtered Chip 3, and finally reaches the photosensitive element 2.
  • the first lens group G1 does not move
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O
  • the first lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O.
  • the distance H3 between G1 and the second lens group G2 increases, and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the distance between the first lens group G1 and the photosensitive element 2 remains unchanged, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 decreases.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged, and the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged.
  • the distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the following combines data and simulation results to present a specific solution of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 7A in a possible embodiment.
  • Table 4a shows the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 7A in a possible embodiment.
  • the thickness includes the thickness of the lens itself and the distance between the lenses.
  • the virtual surface is an imaginary surface located between the filter 3 and the photosensitive element 2, and is used to examine whether the light spots converge.
  • Table 4b shows the aspherical coefficients of each lens in a possible embodiment of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 7A.
  • the aspheric surface of the telephoto lens 1 in Table 4a can be defined by, but is not limited to, the following aspheric surface curve equation:
  • z is the relative distance between a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis and the plane tangent to the intersection point on the aspheric optical axis; r is the perpendicular distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis; c is the curvature; K is the cone coefficient; ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient, please refer to Table 4b.
  • Table 4c and Table 4d are basic parameters of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 7A in a possible embodiment.
  • f1 to f7 in Table 4c are the focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the seventh lens L7 respectively
  • F1 and F2 in Table 4d are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively
  • T1 and T2 are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively.
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side, and the space between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the distance (S8) is increased by 2.2mm, that is, the focusing stroke of the second lens group G2 moving to the image side is 2.2mm.
  • the focusing stroke is significantly shortened and the focusing ability is strong.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 14.55mm; when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 10.5mm.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side, and the distance (S8) between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases by 2.2 mm.
  • the distance (S14) between the second lens group G2 and the filter 3 is reduced by 2.2 mm to keep the height of the telephoto lens 1 unchanged.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group is smaller and has a stronger ability to gather light, making it easier to focus and shorten the motor stroke.
  • (F1-F2)/F1 is approximately equal to 3, then the focal length difference between the two lens groups is small, which can improve the light gathering ability of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate close-up imaging; and the focal length of the second lens group G2 F2 is larger, which can reduce the deflection of light by the telephoto lens 1, reduce aberrations, and improve imaging quality.
  • the focal length f1 of the first lens L1 is the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 has a small difference with the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 to obtain the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f5 of the fifth lens L5 is the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2. 0.2 ⁇ f5/F2 ⁇ 1, that is, 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1, so that the second lens group G2
  • the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 has a small difference with the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 to obtain the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2.
  • the thickness of the first lens group G1 is smaller, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate storage; it facilitates the movement of the first lens group G1 and improves imaging quality.
  • -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1 is conducive to making the second lens group G2 have a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group G2, improving Imaging quality.
  • Figure 7C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 7A when focusing on a distant view.
  • Figure 7D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 7B when focusing on a 50 mm close-up view. Simulation renderings.
  • FIG. 7C and FIG. 7D both include the axial chromatic aberration curve, astigmatism field curve diagram and distortion diagram of the telephoto lens 1.
  • the axial chromatic aberration curve includes spherical aberration curves corresponding to different wavebands of the system (the diagram includes 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm); its physical meaning is that the light of the corresponding wavelength emitted in the 0-degree field of view passes through After the optical system, the deviation relative to the ideal image point; its abscissa is the deviation value along the optical axis, and the ordinate is the normalized coordinate at the pupil.
  • the values shown in Figure 7C and Figure 7D are both small.
  • the astigmatism field curve diagram is used to illustrate the deviation of the convergence point of thin beams in different fields of view from the ideal imaging plane. field of view.
  • a certain field of view value is too large, the image quality of the field of view is poor or there are advanced aberrations.
  • the curvature of field in both directions is small, and the system has a good depth of focus.
  • the distortion diagram is used to characterize the relative deviation between the beam convergence point (actual image height) and the ideal image height in different fields of view. The distortion shown in Figure 7C and Figure 7D is small, which ensures that there is no obvious distortion of the picture.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module 10 when focusing on a distant view in the fifth embodiment provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 8A when focusing on a 50 mm lens. Schematic diagram of light path in close-up view.
  • the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 8A includes most of the technical features of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3B . The differences between the two are mainly described below, and most of the same contents between the two will not be described again.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes six lenses.
  • the first lens group G1 includes three lenses. By moving the first lens group G1 and fixing the second lens group G2, way to focus.
  • the camera module 10 includes a telephoto lens 1, a filter 3 and a photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G1 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • Lens group G2 the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power
  • the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 have positive refractive power.
  • the distance H3 between the lens groups G2 changes.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 are arranged side by side.
  • the light passes through the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 in sequence, then passes through the filter 3, and finally reaches Photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a distant view, the light reflected by the distant object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, and the camera module 10 can capture the distant view image.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis O.
  • the light reflected by the close-up object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on On the photosensitive element 2, the camera module 10 can capture close-up images.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 increases, and the third The distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged.
  • the following combines data and simulation results to present a specific solution of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 8A in a possible embodiment.
  • Table 5a is the curvature radius, thickness, and refractive index of each lens and filter 3 when the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 8A focuses on a distant view in a possible embodiment.
  • Nd Abbe number.
  • the thickness includes The thickness of the lens itself, including the distance between lenses.
  • the virtual surface is an imaginary surface located between the filter 3 and the photosensitive element 2, and is used to examine whether the light spots converge.
  • Table 5b shows the aspherical coefficients of each lens in a possible embodiment of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 8A.
  • the aspheric surface of the telephoto lens 1 in Table 5a can be defined by, but is not limited to, the following aspheric surface curve equation:
  • z is the relative distance between a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis and the plane tangent to the intersection point on the aspheric optical axis; r is the perpendicular distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis; c is the curvature; K is the cone coefficient; ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient, please refer to Table 5b.
  • Table 5c and Table 5d are basic parameters of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 8A in a possible embodiment.
  • f1 to f6 in Table 5c are the focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the sixth lens L6 respectively
  • F1 and F2 in Table 5d are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively
  • T1 and T2 are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 switches from a distant view to a close view, for example, it switches to focus on a close view of 50 mm, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side, and the space between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the distance (S6) is increased by 2mm, that is, the focusing stroke of the first lens group G1 moving to the object side is 2mm.
  • the focusing stroke is significantly shortened and the focusing ability is strong.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 14.6mm; when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 12.4mm.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side, and the distance (S6) between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases by 2 mm.
  • the distance (S12) between the second lens group G2 and the filter 3 remains unchanged, so that a single group focusing method can be used to simplify the focusing method.
  • the height of the telephoto lens 1 is increased.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 is smaller and has a strong ability to gather light, which is beneficial to Achieve close-up shooting within 10 cm.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group is smaller and has a stronger ability to gather light, making it easier to focus and shorten the motor stroke.
  • (F1-F2)/F1 is approximately equal to 3, then the focal length difference between the two lens groups is small, which can improve the light gathering ability of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate close-up imaging; and the focal length of the second lens group G2 F2 is larger, which can reduce the deflection of light by the telephoto lens 1, reduce aberrations, and improve imaging quality.
  • the focal length f1 of the first lens L1 is the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 has a small difference with the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 to obtain the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f4 of the fourth lens L4 is the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2. 0.2 ⁇ f4/F2 ⁇ 1, that is, 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1, so that the second lens group G2
  • the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 has a small difference with the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 to obtain the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2.
  • the thickness of the first lens group G1 is smaller, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate storage; it facilitates the movement of the first lens group G1 and improves imaging quality.
  • -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1 is conducive to making the second lens group G2 have a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group G2, improving Imaging quality.
  • T1+T2 7.98
  • T1+T2 ⁇ 0.6EFL the sum of the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1 and the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2 is small, so that when When the telephoto lens 1 is in the stored state, the overall height of the camera module 10 is small and occupies a small space in the inner cavity of the electronic device 100, which is convenient for storage and can Suitable for thin electronic devices.
  • Figure 8C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 8A when focusing on a distant view.
  • Figure 8D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 8B when focusing on a 50 mm close-up view. Simulation renderings.
  • FIG. 8C and FIG. 8D both include the axial chromatic aberration curve, astigmatism field curve diagram and distortion diagram of the telephoto lens 1 .
  • the axial chromatic aberration curve includes spherical aberration curves corresponding to different wavebands of the system (the diagram includes 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm); its physical meaning is that the light of the corresponding wavelength emitted in the 0-degree field of view passes through After the optical system, the deviation relative to the ideal image point; its abscissa is the deviation value along the optical axis, and the ordinate is the normalized coordinate at the pupil.
  • the values shown in Figure 8C and Figure 8D are both small.
  • the astigmatism field curve diagram is used to illustrate the deviation of the convergence point of thin beams in different fields of view from the ideal imaging plane. field of view.
  • a certain field of view value is too large, the image quality of the field of view is poor or there are advanced aberrations.
  • the curvature of field in both directions is small, and the system has a good depth of focus.
  • the distortion diagram is used to characterize the relative deviation between the beam convergence point (actual image height) and the ideal image height in different fields of view. The distortion shown in Figure 8C and Figure 8D is small, which ensures that there is no obvious distortion of the picture.
  • FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module 10 when focusing on a distant view in the sixth embodiment provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 9A when focusing on a 50 mm lens. Schematic diagram of light path in close-up view.
  • the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 9A includes most of the technical features of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3B. The differences between the two are mainly described below, and most of the same contents between the two will not be described again.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes six lenses.
  • the first lens group G1 includes three lenses. By moving the second lens group G2 and fixing the first lens group G1 to focus.
  • the camera module 10 includes a telephoto lens 1, a filter 3 and a photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens group G1 and a second lens arranged along the object side to the image side. Group G2, the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 have positive refractive power.
  • the distance H3 between the groups G2 changes.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 are arranged side by side.
  • the light passes through the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4, the fifth lens L5 and the sixth lens L6 in sequence, then passes through the filter 3, and finally reaches Photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes six lenses.
  • the first lens L1 closest to the object side among the three lenses of the first lens group G1 is the main lens
  • the second lens L2 and the third lens L3 among the three lenses of the first lens group G1 are used to Parameters such as the focal length of lens L1 are adjusted so that the first lens group G1 obtains preset optical performance.
  • the first lens group G1 adjusts the main lens through two lenses, the optical path is simple, the design difficulty of each lens is low, and the thickness TI of the first lens group G1 is small, and the height of the telephoto lens 1 Smaller for easy storage.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a distant view, the light reflected by the distant object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2 , and the camera module 10 can capture the distant view image.
  • the second lens group G2 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on the close-up view, the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O.
  • the light reflected by the close-up object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on On the photosensitive element 2, the camera module 10 can capture close-up images.
  • the first lens group G1 does not move
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O
  • the first lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O.
  • the distance H3 between G1 and the second lens group G2 increases, and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the distance between the first lens group G1 and the photosensitive element 2 remains unchanged, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 decreases.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged. distance decreases.
  • the following combines data and simulation results to present a specific solution of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 9A in a possible embodiment.
  • Table 6a is the curvature radius, thickness, and refractive index of each lens and filter 3 when the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 9A focuses on a distant view in a possible embodiment.
  • Nd Abbe number.
  • the thickness includes the thickness of the lens itself and the distance between the lenses.
  • the virtual surface is an imaginary surface located between the filter 3 and the photosensitive element 2, and is used to examine whether the light spots converge.
  • Table 6b shows the aspherical coefficients of each lens in a possible embodiment of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 9A.
  • the aspheric surface of the telephoto lens 1 in Table 6a can be defined by, but is not limited to, the following aspheric surface curve equation:
  • z is the relative distance between a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis and the plane tangent to the intersection point on the aspheric optical axis; r is the perpendicular distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis; c is the curvature; K is the cone coefficient; ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient, please refer to Table 6b.
  • Table 6c and Table 6d are the basic parameters of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 9A in a possible embodiment.
  • f1 to f6 in Table 6c are the focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the sixth lens L6 respectively
  • F1 and F2 in Table 6d are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively
  • T1 and T2 are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively.
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side, and the space between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the distance (S6) is increased by 2.3mm, that is, the focusing stroke of the second lens group G2 moving to the image side is 2.3mm.
  • the focusing stroke is significantly shortened and the focusing ability is strong.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 14.55mm; when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 10.6mm.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side, and the distance (S6) between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases by 2.3 mm.
  • the distance (S12) between the second lens group G2 and the filter 3 is reduced by 2.3 mm to keep the height of the telephoto lens 1 unchanged.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group is smaller and has a stronger ability to gather light, making it easier to focus and shorten the motor stroke.
  • (F1-F2)/F1 is approximately equal to 3, then the focal length difference between the two lens groups is small, which can improve the light gathering ability of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate close-up imaging; and the focal length of the second lens group G2 F2 is larger, which can reduce the deflection of light by the telephoto lens 1, reduce aberrations, and improve imaging quality.
  • the focal length f1 of the first lens L1 is the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 has a small difference with the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 to obtain the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f4 of the fourth lens L4 is the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2. 0.2 ⁇ f4/F2 ⁇ 1, that is, 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1, so that the second lens group G2
  • the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 has a small difference with the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 to obtain the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2.
  • the thickness of the first lens group G1 is smaller, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate storage; it facilitates the movement of the first lens group G1 and improves imaging quality.
  • -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1 is conducive to making the second lens group G2 have a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group G2, improving Imaging quality.
  • T1+T2 8.09
  • T1+T2 ⁇ 0.6EFL the sum of the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1 and the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2 is small, so that when When the telephoto lens 1 is in the stored state, the overall height of the camera module 10 is small and occupies a small space in the inner cavity of the electronic device 100, which is convenient for storage and can Suitable for thin electronic devices.
  • Figure 9C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 9A when focusing on a distant view.
  • Figure 9D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 9B when focusing on a 50 mm close-up view. Simulation renderings.
  • FIG. 9C and FIG. 9D both include the axial chromatic aberration curve, astigmatism field curve diagram and distortion diagram of the telephoto lens 1 .
  • the axial chromatic aberration curve includes spherical aberration curves corresponding to different wavebands of the system (the diagram includes 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm); its physical meaning is that the light of the corresponding wavelength emitted in the 0-degree field of view passes through After the optical system, the deviation relative to the ideal image point; its abscissa is the deviation value along the optical axis, and the ordinate is the normalized coordinate at the pupil.
  • the values shown in Figure 9C and Figure 9D are both small.
  • the astigmatism field curve diagram is used to illustrate the deviation of the convergence point of thin beams in different fields of view from the ideal imaging plane. field of view.
  • a certain field of view value is too large, the image quality of the field of view is poor or there are advanced aberrations.
  • the curvature of field in both directions is small, and the system has a good depth of focus.
  • the distortion diagram is used to characterize the relative deviation between the beam convergence point (actual image height) and the ideal image height in different fields of view. The distortion shown in Figure 9C and Figure 9D is small, ensuring that there is no obvious distortion of the picture.
  • Figure 10A is a schematic diagram of the optical path when the camera module 10 is focused on a distant view in the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10B is a schematic diagram of the camera module 10 shown in Figure 10A when it is focused on a 50 mm lens. Schematic diagram of light path in close-up view.
  • the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 10A includes most of the technical features of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3B. The differences between the two are mainly described below, and most of the same contents between the two will not be described again.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes five lenses.
  • the first lens group G1 includes three lenses. Focusing is performed by moving the first lens group G1 and fixing the second lens group G2.
  • the camera module 10 includes a telephoto lens 1, a filter 3 and a photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens group G1 and a second lens arranged along the object side to the image side. Group G2, the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 have positive refractive power.
  • the distance H3 between the groups G2 changes.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 are arranged side by side.
  • the light passes through the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 in sequence, then passes through the filter 3, and finally reaches the photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a distant view, the light reflected by the distant object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, and the camera module 10 can capture the distant view image.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis O.
  • the light reflected by the close-up object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging plane.
  • the imaging plane falls on On the photosensitive element 2, the camera module 10 can capture close-up images.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 increases, and the third The distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged.
  • the following combines data and simulation results to present a specific solution of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 10A in a possible embodiment.
  • Table 7a shows the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 10A in a possible embodiment.
  • the thickness includes the thickness of the lens itself and the distance between the lenses.
  • the virtual surface is an imaginary surface located between the filter 3 and the photosensitive element 2, and is used to examine whether the light spots converge.
  • Table 7b shows the aspherical coefficients of each lens in a possible embodiment of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 10A.
  • the aspheric surface of the telephoto lens 1 in Table 7a can be defined by, but is not limited to, the following aspheric surface curve equation:
  • z is the relative distance between a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis and the plane tangent to the intersection point on the aspheric optical axis; r is the perpendicular distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis; c is the curvature; K is the cone coefficient; ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient, please refer to Table 7b.
  • Table 7c and Table 7d are basic parameters of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 10A in a possible embodiment.
  • f1 to f5 in Table 7c are the focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the fifth lens L5 respectively
  • F1 and F2 in Table 7d are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively
  • T1 and T2 are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 switches from a distant view to a close view, for example, it switches to focus on a close view of 50 mm, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side, and the space between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the distance (S6) is increased by 2mm, that is, the focusing stroke of the first lens group G1 moving to the object side is 2mm.
  • the focusing stroke is significantly shortened and the focusing ability is strong.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 14.6mm; when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 12.1mm.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side, and the distance (S6) between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases by 2 mm.
  • the distance (S10) between the second lens group G2 and the filter 3 remains unchanged, so that a single group focusing method can be used to simplify the focusing method.
  • the height of the telephoto lens 1 is increased.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 is smaller and has a strong ability to gather light, which is beneficial to Achieve close-up shooting within 10 cm.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group is smaller and has a stronger ability to gather light, making it easier to focus and shorten the motor stroke.
  • (F1-F2)/F1 is approximately equal to 3, then the focal length difference between the two lens groups is small, which can improve the light gathering ability of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate close-up imaging; and the focal length of the second lens group G2 F2 is larger, which can reduce the deflection of light by the telephoto lens 1, reduce aberrations, and improve imaging quality.
  • the focal length f1 of the first lens L1 is the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 has a small difference with the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 to obtain the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f4 of the fourth lens L4 is the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2. 0.2 ⁇ f4/F2 ⁇ 1, that is, 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1, so that the second lens group G2
  • the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 has a small difference with the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 to obtain the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2.
  • the thickness of the first lens group G1 is smaller, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate storage; it facilitates the movement of the first lens group G1 and improves imaging quality.
  • -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1 is conducive to making the second lens group G2 have a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group G2, improving Imaging quality.
  • Figure 10C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 10A when focusing on a distant view.
  • Figure 10D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 10B when focusing on a 50 mm close-up view. Simulation renderings.
  • FIG. 10C and FIG. 10D both include the axial chromatic aberration curve, astigmatism field curve diagram and distortion diagram of the telephoto lens 1 .
  • the axial chromatic aberration curve includes spherical aberration curves corresponding to different wavebands of the system (the diagram includes 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm); its physical meaning is that the light of the corresponding wavelength emitted in the 0-degree field of view passes through After the optical system, the deviation relative to the ideal image point; its abscissa is the deviation value along the optical axis, and the ordinate is the normalized coordinate at the pupil.
  • the values shown in Figure 10C and Figure 10D are both small.
  • the astigmatism field curve diagram is used to illustrate the deviation of the convergence point of thin beams in different fields of view from the ideal imaging plane
  • X is the arc
  • Y is the meridional direction beam
  • its abscissa is the deviation value along the optical axis
  • the ordinate is the corresponding field of view.
  • the curvature of field in both directions is small, and the system has a good depth of focus.
  • the distortion diagram is used to characterize the relative deviation between the beam convergence point (actual image height) and the ideal image height in different fields of view.
  • the distortion shown in Figure 10C and Figure 10D is small, which ensures that there is no obvious distortion of the picture.
  • FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of the optical path of the camera module 10 when focusing on a distant view in the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 11A when focusing on a 50 mm lens. Schematic diagram of light path in close-up view.
  • the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 11A includes most of the technical features of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3B . The differences between the two are mainly described below, and most of the same contents between the two will not be described again.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes five lenses.
  • the first lens group G1 includes three lenses. Focusing is performed by moving the second lens group G2 and fixing the first lens group G1.
  • the camera module 10 includes a telephoto lens 1, a filter 3 and a photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens group G1 and a second lens arranged along the object side to the image side. Group G2, the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 have positive refractive power.
  • the distance H3 between the groups G2 changes.
  • the first lens group G1 of the telephoto lens 1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2 and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 are arranged side by side.
  • the light passes through the first lens L1, the second lens L2, the third lens L3, the fourth lens L4 and the fifth lens L5 in sequence, then passes through the filter 3, and finally reaches the photosensitive element 2.
  • the telephoto lens 1 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a distant view, the light reflected by the distant object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging surface.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, and the camera module 10 can capture the distant view image.
  • the second lens group G2 when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O.
  • the light reflected by the close-up object passes through the telephoto lens 1 and is imaged on the imaging plane.
  • the imaging plane falls on On the photosensitive element 2, the camera module 10 can capture close-up images.
  • the first lens group G1 does not move
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O
  • the first lens group G2 moves toward the image side along the optical axis O.
  • the distance H3 between G1 and the second lens group G2 increases, and the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the distance between the first lens group G1 and the photosensitive element 2 remains unchanged, and the distance between the second lens group G2 and the photosensitive element 2 decreases.
  • the imaging surface falls on the photosensitive element 2, that is, the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged, and the distance between the first lens group G1 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 remains unchanged.
  • the distance between the second lens group G2 and the imaging surface of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the following combines data and simulation results to present a specific solution of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 11A in a possible embodiment.
  • Table 8a is the curvature radius, thickness, and refractive index of each lens and filter 3 when the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 11A focuses on a distant view in a possible embodiment.
  • Nd Abbe number.
  • the thickness includes the thickness of the lens itself and the distance between the lenses.
  • the virtual surface is an imaginary surface located between the filter 3 and the photosensitive element 2, and is used to examine whether the light spots converge.
  • Table 8b shows the aspherical coefficients of each lens in a possible embodiment of the telephoto lens 1 shown in FIG. 11A.
  • the aspheric surface of the telephoto lens 1 in Table 8a can be defined by, but is not limited to, the following aspheric surface curve equation:
  • z is the relative distance between a point on the aspheric surface that is r from the optical axis and the plane tangent to the intersection point on the aspheric optical axis; r is the perpendicular distance between the point on the aspheric curve and the optical axis; c is the curvature; K is the cone coefficient; ⁇ i is the i-th order aspheric coefficient, please refer to Table 8b.
  • Table 8c and Table 8d are basic parameters of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 11A in a possible embodiment.
  • f1 to f5 in Table 8c are the focal lengths of the first lens L1 to the fifth lens L5 respectively
  • F1 and F2 in Table 8d are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively
  • T1 and T2 are the focal lengths of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 respectively.
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side, and the space between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the distance (S6) is increased by 2mm, that is, the focusing stroke of the second lens group G2 moving to the image side is 2mm.
  • the focusing stroke is significantly shortened and the focusing ability is strong.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 14.6mm; when the telephoto lens 1 focuses on a close-up view, the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 is 10.7mm.
  • the effective focal length EFL of the telephoto lens 1 decreases.
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the image side, and the distance (S6) between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 increases by 2 mm, correspondingly Therefore, the distance (S10) between the second lens group G2 and the filter 3 is reduced by 2 mm to keep the height of the telephoto lens 1 unchanged.
  • the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1 is smaller and has a strong ability to gather light, which is beneficial to Achieve close-up shooting within 10 cm.
  • the focal length F2 of the second lens group is smaller and has a stronger ability to gather light, making it easier to focus and shorten the motor stroke.
  • (F1-F2)/F1 is approximately equal to 3, then the focal length difference between the two lens groups is small, which can improve the light gathering ability of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate close-up imaging; and the focal length of the second lens group G2 F2 is larger, which can reduce the deflection of light by the telephoto lens 1, reduce aberrations, and improve imaging quality.
  • the focal length f1 of the first lens L1 is the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 has a small difference with the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f11 of the first lens L11 to obtain the focal length F1 of the first lens group G1.
  • the focal length f4 of the fourth lens L4 is the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2. 0.2 ⁇ f4/F2 ⁇ 1, that is, 0.2 ⁇ f21/F2 ⁇ 1, so that the second lens group G2
  • the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 has a small difference with the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2, which makes it easy to adjust the focal length f21 of the first lens L21 to obtain the focal length F2 of the second lens group G2.
  • the thickness of the first lens group G1 is smaller, which can reduce the height of the telephoto lens 1 and facilitate storage; it facilitates the movement of the first lens group G1 and improves imaging quality.
  • -1 ⁇ T2/F2 ⁇ -0.1 is conducive to making the second lens group G2 have a smaller thickness, thereby reducing the height of the telephoto lens 1 for easy storage; and facilitating the movement of the second lens group G2, improving Imaging quality.
  • T1+T2 7.96
  • T1+T2 ⁇ 0.6EFL the sum of the thickness T1 of the first lens group G1 and the thickness T2 of the second lens group G2 is small, so that when When the telephoto lens 1 is in the stored state, the overall height of the camera module 10 is smaller and occupies a smaller space in the inner cavity of the electronic device 100, which is convenient for storage and can be better applied to thin electronic devices. .
  • Figure 11C is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 shown in Figure 11A when focusing on a distant view.
  • Figure 11D is a simulation rendering of the telephoto lens 1 when focusing on a 50 mm close-up view shown in Figure 11B. Simulation renderings.
  • FIG. 11C and FIG. 11D both include the axial chromatic aberration curve, astigmatism field curve diagram and distortion diagram of the telephoto lens 1.
  • the axial chromatic aberration curve includes spherical aberration curves corresponding to different wavebands of the system (the diagram includes 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm); its physical meaning is that the light of the corresponding wavelength emitted in the 0-degree field of view passes through After the optical system, the deviation relative to the ideal image point; its abscissa is the deviation value along the optical axis, and the ordinate is the normalized coordinate at the pupil.
  • the values shown in Figure 11C and Figure 11D are both small.
  • the astigmatism field curve diagram is used to illustrate the deviation of the convergence point of thin beams in different fields of view from the ideal imaging plane. field of view.
  • a certain field of view value is too large, the image quality of the field of view is poor or there are advanced aberrations.
  • the curvature of field in both directions is small, and the system has a good depth of focus.
  • the distortion diagram is used to characterize the relative deviation between the beam convergence point (actual image height) and the ideal image height in different fields of view. The distortion shown in Figure 11C and Figure 11D is small, ensuring that there is no obvious distortion of the picture.
  • the first lens L1 of the first lens group G1 shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B corresponds to the first lens L11 of the first lens group G1 shown in FIG. 3C
  • the second lens L2 of the first lens group G1 corresponds to The second lens L12 of the first lens group G1 shown in FIG. 3C
  • the fourth lens L4, The fifth lens L5 of the second lens group G2 shown in FIGS. 7A, 7B, 6A and 6B all correspond to the first lens L21 of the second lens group G2 shown in FIG. 3C.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Lenses (AREA)

Abstract

一种长焦镜头（1）、摄像头模组（10）及电子设备（100）。长焦镜头（1）对焦于远景时，长焦镜头（1）的视场角FOV小于60°。长焦镜头（1）包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组（G1）以及第二透镜组（G2），第一透镜组（G1）具有正光焦度，第二透镜组（G2）具有负光焦度，长焦镜头（1）在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组（G1）与第二透镜组（G2）之间的距离变化。长焦镜头（1）既可以实现远景拍摄且成像质量高，也可以具有较强的近景拍摄能力，实现远景到近景下的广物距成像。

Description

长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备
本申请要求于2022年03月15日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210255613.4、申请名称为“长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及拍摄设备技术领域，尤其涉及一种长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备。
背景技术
现有的长焦镜头主要用于远景拍摄，在拍摄较远的景物或拍摄不易接近的物体时，长焦镜头能够展现远处的被摄物体的细节，具有较好的远景拍摄能力。但是，现有的长焦镜头在拍摄近景时成像效果差，限制了长焦镜头在近景拍摄场景中的应用。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备，长焦镜头既可以实现远距离拍摄且成像质量高，也可以具有较强的近景拍摄能力，实现远景到近景下的广物距成像。
第一方面，本申请提供一种长焦镜头。长焦镜头对焦于远景时，长焦镜头的视场角小于60°。长焦镜头包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组以及第二透镜组，第一透镜组具有正光焦度，第二透镜组具有负光焦度，长焦镜头在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组与第二透镜组之间的距离变化，长焦镜头的最近对焦距离小于10厘米。
本申请提供的长焦镜头既可以实现远距离拍摄且成像质量高，也可以具有较强的近景拍摄能力，实现远景到近景下的广物距成像。
此外，第一透镜组具有正光焦度，第二透镜组具有负光焦度，使得长焦镜头的高度小于长焦镜头的有效焦距EFL，以减小长焦镜头的高度，有利于摄像头模组的小型化。
一些实现方式中，在长焦镜头从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组与第二透镜组之间的距离增大。
在本实现方式中，在长焦镜头从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组和第二透镜组之间的距离增大，能够获得较高的近景成像质量。在其他一些实现方式中，在长焦镜头从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组和第二透镜组之间的距离也可以减小，本申请对此不作限定。
一些实现方式中，在长焦镜头从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组与长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组与长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离减小；
或，第一透镜组与长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组与长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离不变；
或，第一透镜组与长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组与长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离减小。
在本实现方式中，可以采用单群对焦的方式，简化对焦结构的运动方式，并简化对焦方法。其中，第一透镜组不动，通过移动第二透镜组进行对焦，能够简化长焦镜头的对焦结构的运动方式，从而简化对焦方法。此外，第一透镜组位于第二透镜组的物侧，增加了可移动的光路空间，利于减小光线转折角度、减小像差，提升成像质量。第二透镜组不动，通过移 动第一透镜组进行对焦，能够简化长焦镜头的对焦结构的运动方式，从而简化对焦方法。
此外，还可以采用双群对焦的方式，在本实现方式中，第一透镜组和第二透镜组与成像面之间的距离均发生变化，从而减小第一透镜组和第二透镜组各自的对焦行程，还能够提高第一透镜组和第二透镜组的运动精度，提升长焦镜头的对焦能力。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组的焦距F1与长焦镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：F1≤0.9EFL，或，0.9EFL<F1<EFL。
在本实现方式中，通过设置F1≤0.9EFL，或，0.9EFL<F1<EFL，使得第一透镜组的焦距较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，能够使得长焦镜头用于10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
一些实现方式中，第二透镜组的焦距F2与长焦镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：-EFL<F2。
在本实现方式中，通过设置-EFL<F2，能够减小第二透镜组的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头的高度，便于收纳；并使得第二透镜组焦距较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，减小马达行程。此外，第二透镜组的厚度小，能够减小长焦镜头的高度，有利于摄像头模组的小型化。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组的焦距F1与第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：1<(F1-F2)/F1≤3，或，3<(F1-F2)/F1<9。
在本实现方式中，当两个透镜组的焦距都比较小，且两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，也即(F1-F2)/F1数值较小，则会提升长焦镜头对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；但会增大长焦镜头对光线的偏折程度，增大像差，成像可能不清晰，成像质量较差。当第二透镜组的焦距较大，且与第一透镜组的焦距相差较大，也即(F1-F2)/F1数值较大，则会降低长焦镜头对光线的汇聚能力，不利于实现近景成像；但会减小长焦镜头对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。因此，可以根据实际应用场景的需求对两个透镜组的焦距进行设计。通过设置1<(F1-F2)/F1≤3，或，3<(F1-F2)/F1<9，以提升长焦镜头的对焦能力和成像质量。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组包括两片至四片透镜；或，第二透镜组包括两片至四片透镜；或，长焦镜头包括四片至八片透镜。
在本实现方式中，通过调整第一透镜组和第二透镜组的透镜数量，能够获得不同规格的设计，以适应多样化的应用场景。示例性的，第一透镜组和第二透镜组的透镜的数量多，则长焦镜头的规格高，成像质量高，但也增加了第一透镜组和第二透镜组内的各片透镜的设计难度；第一透镜组和第二透镜组的透镜的数量少，第一透镜组和第二透镜组内的各片透镜的设计难度低，但长焦镜头的规格低，成像质量差，可以根据不同需求选择不同的透镜数量。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组包括靠近物侧的第一片透镜，第一透镜组的第一片透镜的焦距f11与第一透镜组的焦距F1满足：0.5<f11/F1<1；
第二透镜组包括靠近物侧的第一片透镜，第二透镜组的第一片透镜的焦距f21与第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：0.2<f21/F2<1。
在本实现方式中，通过设计0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组的第一片透镜的焦距与第一透镜组的焦距相差较小，便于对第一片透镜的焦距进行调节，以获得第一透镜组的焦距。
此外，通过设计0.2<f21/F1<1，使得第二透镜组的第一片透镜的焦距与第二透镜组的焦距相差较小，便于对第一片透镜的焦距进行调节，以获得第二透镜组的焦距。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组还包括第二片透镜，第一透镜组的第二片透镜相邻地位于第一透镜组的第一片透镜的物侧，第一透镜组的第一片透镜的阿贝数与第一透镜组的第二片透镜的阿贝数之和大于20。
在本实现方式中，第一片透镜的阿贝数和第二片透镜的阿贝数之和可以大于20，有利于长焦镜头的色差矫正。
一些实现方式中，第二透镜组的多片透镜的阿贝数之和大于18。
在本实现方式中，第二透镜组的多片透镜的阿贝数之和大于18，有利于长焦镜头的色差矫正。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组的厚度T1与第一透镜组的焦距F1满足：0.1<T1/F1≤0.3，或，0.3<T1/F1<1；
或，第二透镜组的厚度T2与第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：-1<T2/F2<-0.1。
在本实现方式中，通过设置0.1<T1/F1≤0.3，或，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组的厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头的高度，便于收纳；并便于第一透镜组的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，通过设置-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组的移动，提高成像质量。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组的厚度T1、第二透镜组的厚度T2与长焦镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：T1+T2≤0.6EFL，或，0.6EFL<T1+T2≤0.8EFL，或,0.8EFL<T1+T2<EFL。
在本实现方式中，通过设置T1+T2≤0.6EFL，或，0.6EFL<T1+T2≤0.8EFL，或,0.8EFL<T1+T2<EFL，第一透镜组的厚度和第二透镜组的厚度之和较小，使得当长焦镜头处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组的整体高度较小，且在电子设备的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
一些实现方式中，长焦镜头的像高ImgH满足：ImgH>2毫米。
在本实现方式中，长焦镜头具有小视场角和大的板面尺寸，以具有较强的远景拍摄能力，在远景拍摄中的成像质量高。
第二方面，本申请还提供一种摄像头模组，包括感光元件、第一驱动机构以及长焦镜头，感光元件位于长焦镜头的像侧；第一驱动机构与长焦镜头连接，用于控制长焦镜头沿靠近或远离感光元件的方向移动。本申请提供的摄像头模组既可以实现远距离拍摄且成像质量高，也可以具有较强的近景拍摄能力，实现远景到近景下的广物距成像。
本申请提供的长焦镜头既可以实现远距离拍摄且成像质量高，也可以具有较强的近景拍摄能力，实现远景到近景下的广物距成像。
此外，本申请可以通过第一驱动机构实现自动对焦(auto focus，AF)。
一些实现方式中，摄像头模组还包括第二驱动机构，第二驱动机构与第一透镜组连接，用于控制第一透镜组沿光轴移动；
和/或摄像头模组还包括第三驱动机构，第三驱动机构与第二透镜组连接，用于控制第二透镜组沿光轴移动。
在本实现方式中，第二驱动机构用于控制第一透镜组沿光轴移动，以改变第一透镜组和第二透镜组之间的距离，实现长焦镜头在远景模式和近景模式之间的切换。
此外，第三驱动机构用于控制第二透镜组沿光轴移动，以改变第一透镜组和第二透镜组之间的距离，实现长焦镜头在远景模式和近景模式之间的切换。
第三方面，本申请还提供一种电子设备，包括图像处理器和摄像头模组，图像处理器与摄像头模组通信连接，图像处理器用于从摄像头模组获取图像信号，并处理图像信号。本申 请提供的电子设备既可以实现远距离拍摄且成像质量高，也可以具有较强的近景拍摄能力，实现远景到近景下的广物距成像。
第四方面，本申请又提供一种电子设备，包括第一镜头和第二镜头，第二镜头为第一镜头的3x光学变焦镜头；第二镜头对焦于远景时，第二镜头的视场角小于60°；第二镜头包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组以及第二透镜组，第一透镜组具有正光焦度，第二透镜组具有负光焦度，第二镜头在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组与第二透镜组之间的距离变化，第二镜头的最近对焦距离小于10厘米。
本申请提供的电子设备既可以实现远距离拍摄且成像质量高，也可以具有较强的近景拍摄能力，实现远景到近景下的广物距成像。
一些实现方式中，在第二镜头从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组与第二镜头的成像面之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组与第二镜头的成像面之间的距离减小；
或，第一透镜组与第二镜头的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组与第二镜头的成像面之间的距离不变；
或，第一透镜组与第二镜头的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组与第二镜头的成像面之间的距离减小。
在本实现方式中，可以采用单群对焦的方式，简化对焦结构的运动方式，并简化对焦方法。其中，第一透镜组不动，通过移动第二透镜组进行对焦，能够简化长焦镜头的对焦结构的运动方式，从而简化对焦方法。此外，第一透镜组位于第二透镜组的物侧，增加了可移动的光路空间，利于减小光线转折角度、减小像差，提升成像质量。第二透镜组不动，通过移动第一透镜组进行对焦，能够简化长焦镜头的对焦结构的运动方式，从而简化对焦方法。
此外，还可以采用双群对焦的方式，在本实现方式中，第一透镜组和第二透镜组与成像面之间的距离均发生变化，从而减小第一透镜组和第二透镜组各自的对焦行程，还能够提高第一透镜组和第二透镜组的运动精度，提升长焦镜头的对焦能力。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组的焦距F1与第二镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：F1≤0.9EFL，或，0.9EFL<F1<EFL。
在本实现方式中，通过设置F1≤0.9EFL，或，0.9EFL<F1<EFL，使得第一透镜组的焦距较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，能够使得长焦镜头用于10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
一些实现方式中，第二透镜组的焦距F2与第二镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：-EFL<F2。
在本实现方式中，通过设置-EFL<F2，能够减小第二透镜组的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头的高度，便于收纳；并使得第二透镜组焦距较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，减小马达行程。此外，第二透镜组的厚度小，能够减小长焦镜头的高度，有利于摄像头模组的小型化。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组的焦距F1与第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：1<(F1-F2)/F1≤3，或，3<(F1-F2)/F1<9。
在本实现方式中，当两个透镜组的焦距都比较小，且两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，也即(F1-F2)/F1数值较小，则会提升长焦镜头对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；但会增大长焦镜头对光线的偏折程度，增大像差，成像可能不清晰，成像质量较差。当第二透镜组的焦距较大，且与第一透镜组的焦距相差较大，也即(F1-F2)/F1数值较大，则会降低长焦镜头对光线的汇聚能力，不利于实现近景成像；但会减小长焦镜头对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。因此，可以根据实际应用场景的需求对两个透 镜组的焦距进行设计。通过设置1<(F1-F2)/F1≤3，或，3<(F1-F2)/F1<9，以提升长焦镜头的对焦能力和成像质量。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组的厚度T1与第一透镜组的焦距F1满足：0.1<T1/F1≤0.3，或，0.3<T1/F1<1；
或第二透镜组的厚度T2与第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：-1<T2/F2<-0.1。
在本实现方式中，通过设置0.1<T1/F1≤0.3，或，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组的厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头的高度，便于收纳；并便于第一透镜组的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，通过设置-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组的移动，提高成像质量。
一些实现方式中，第一透镜组的厚度T1、第二透镜组的厚度T2与第二镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：T1+T2≤0.6EFL，或，0.6EFL<T1+T2≤0.8EFL，或,0.8EFL<T1+T2<EFL。
在本实现方式中，通过设置T1+T2≤0.6EFL，或，0.6EFL<T1+T2≤0.8EFL，或,0.8EFL<T1+T2<EFL，第一透镜组的厚度和第二透镜组的厚度之和较小，使得当长焦镜头处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组的整体高度较小，且在电子设备的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
一些实现方式中，第二镜头的像高ImgH满足：ImgH>2毫米。
在本实现方式中，长焦镜头具有小视场角和大的板面尺寸，以具有较强的远景拍摄能力，在远景拍摄中的成像质量高。
附图说明
图1A是本申请实施例提供的电子设备在一些实施例中的结构示意图；
图1B是图1A所示摄像头模组在一些应用场景中的视场角FOV的示意图；
图2是图1A所示摄像头模组在一些实施例中的结构示意图；
图3A是图2所示摄像头模组在收纳状态的结构示意图；
图3B是图3A所示摄像头模组在弹出状态的对焦于远景时的结构示意图；
图3C是图3A所示摄像头模组在弹出状态的对焦于近景时的结构示意图；
图4A是本申请提供的第一实施例中摄像头模组对焦于远景时的光路示意图；
图4B是图4A所示摄像头模组在对焦于50mm的近景时的光路示意图；
图4C是图4A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图4D是图4B所示对焦于50mm的近景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图5A是本申请提供的第二实施例中摄像头模组对焦于远景时的光路示意图；
图5B是图5A所示摄像头模组在对焦于50mm的近景时的光路示意图；
图5C是图5A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图5D是图5B所示对焦于50mm的近景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图6A是本申请提供的第三实施例中摄像头模组对焦于远景时的光路示意图；
图6B是图6A所示摄像头模组在对焦于50mm的近景时的光路示意图；
图6C是图6A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图6D是图6B所示对焦于50mm的近景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图7A是本申请提供的第四实施例中摄像头模组对焦于远景时的光路示意图；
图7B是图7A所示摄像头模组在对焦于50mm的近景时的光路示意图；
图7C是图7A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图7D是图7B所示对焦于50mm的近景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图8A是本申请提供的第五实施例中摄像头模组对焦于远景时的光路示意图；
图8B是图8A所示摄像头模组在对焦于50mm的近景时的光路示意图；
图8C是图8A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图8D是图8B所示对焦于50mm的近景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图9A是本申请提供的第六实施例中摄像头模组对焦于远景时的光路示意图；
图9B是图9A所示摄像头模组在对焦于50mm的近景时的光路示意图；
图9C是图9A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图9D是图9B所示对焦于50mm的近景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图10A是本申请提供的第七实施例中摄像头模组对焦于远景时的光路示意图；
图10B是图10A所示摄像头模组在对焦于50mm的近景时的光路示意图；
图10C是图10A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图10D是图10B所示对焦于50mm的近景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图11A是本申请提供的第八实施例中摄像头模组对焦于远景时的光路示意图；
图11B是图11A所示摄像头模组在对焦于50mm的近景时的光路示意图；
图11C是图11A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图；
图11D是图11B所示对焦于50mm的近景时的长焦镜头的仿真效果图。
具体实施方式
为方便理解，下面先对本申请实施例所涉及的英文简写和有关技术术语进行解释和描述。
光焦度(focal power)，等于像方光束会聚度与物方光束会聚度之差，它表征光学系统偏折光线的能力。
具有正光焦度的透镜或透镜组，透镜或透镜组具有正的焦距，具有会聚光线的效果。
具有负光焦度的透镜或透镜组，透镜或透镜组具有负的焦距，具有发散光线的效果。
焦距(focal length)，也称为焦长，是光学系统中衡量光的聚集或发散的度量方式，指无限远的景物通过透镜或透镜组在像方焦面结成清晰影像时，透镜或透镜组的光学中心至像方焦面的垂直距离。从实用的角度可以理解为物体在无限远时镜头中心至平面的距离。对于定焦镜头来说，其光学中心的位置是固定不变的；对于长焦镜头来说，镜头的光学中心的变化带来镜头焦距的变化。
镜头的有效焦距(effective focal length，EFL)，是指镜头中心到焦点的距离。
物侧面，以透镜为界，被摄物体所在一侧为物侧，透镜靠近物侧的表面称为物侧面。
像侧面，以透镜为界，被摄物体的图像所在的一侧为像侧，透镜靠近像侧的表面称为像侧面。
物距，是被摄物体到镜头的物侧面的距离。
孔径光阑(aperture diaphragm)，是用来控制光线透过镜头，进入机身内感光面光量的装置，它通常是在镜头内。
光圈值，又称F数(Fno)，是镜头的焦距/镜头入瞳直径得出的相对值(相对孔径的倒数)。光圈值愈小，在同一单位时间内的进光量便愈多。光圈值越大，景深越小，拍照的背景内容将会虚化，类似长焦镜头的效果。
总长度(total track length，TTL)，指镜头最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度，TT L是形成相机高度的主要因素。
成像面，位于长焦镜头中所有透镜的像侧、且光线依次穿过长焦镜头中各透镜后形成像的载面。
视场角(field of view，FOV)，又称视场。在光学仪器中，以光学仪器的镜头为顶点，以被摄物体的物像可通过镜头的最大范围的两条边缘构成的夹角，称为视场角。
光轴，是一条垂直穿过透镜中心的轴线。镜头光轴是通过镜头的各片透镜的中心的轴线。与光轴平行的光线射入凸透镜时，理想的凸透镜应是所有的光线会聚在透镜后的一点，这个会聚所有光线的一点，即为焦点。
焦点，平行光线经透镜或透镜组折射后的会聚点。
像方焦面，也称为后焦面或第二焦面，为经过像方焦点(也称为后焦点或第二焦点)且垂直于系统光轴的平面。
阿贝数(Abbe)，即色散系数，是光学材料在不同波长下的折射率的差值比，代表材料色散程度大小。
像差：光学系统近轴区具有理想光学系统的性质，物体上的一点发出的近轴光线与像面相交在一点(也即近轴像点)，但是实际穿过镜头不同孔径的光线很难完美的相交在一点，而是与近轴像点的位置有一定偏差，这些差异统称为像差。
轴向色差(longitudinal spherical aber)，也称为纵向色差或位置色差或轴向像差，一束平行于光轴的光线，在经过镜头后会聚于前后不同的位置，这种像差称为位置色差或轴向色差。这是由于镜头对各个波长的光所成像的位置不同，使得最后成像时不同色的光的像方焦面不能重合，复色光散开形成色散。
畸变(distortion)，也称为失真，光学系统对物体所成的像相对于物体本身而言的失真程度。畸变是由于光阑球差的影响，不同视场的主光线通过光学系统后与高斯像面的交点高度不等于理想像高，两者之差就是畸变。因此畸变只改变轴外物点在理想面上的成像位置，使像的形状产生失真，但不影响像的清晰度。
像高(Image Hight，ImgH)，表示的是感光芯片上有效像素区域对角线长的一半,也即成像面的像高。
像散(astigmatism)，由于物点不在光学系统的光轴上，它所发出的光束与光轴有一倾斜角。该光束经透镜折射后，其子午细光束与弧矢细光束的汇聚点不在一个点上。即光束不能聚焦于一点，成像不清晰，故产生像散。子午细光束和弧矢细光束是旋转对称的光学系统内两个垂直平面内的光束名称。
场曲(curvature of field)，场曲用于表示非中心视场光线经过光学镜头组后的最清晰像点位置与中心视场最清晰像点位置在光轴向的差异。当透镜存在场曲时，整个光束的交点不与理想像点重合，虽然在每个特定点都能得到清晰的像点，但整个像平面则是一个曲面。
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中，在本申请实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“/”表示或的意思，例如，A/B可以表示A或B；文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况，另外，在本申请实施例的描述中，“多个”是指两个或多于两个。
以下，术语“第一”、“第二”等用词仅用于描述目的，而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此，限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明 示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。
本申请实施例提供一种电子设备。电子设备可以是手机、平板、笔记本电脑、电视机、车载设备、可穿戴设备、视频监控设备等具有拍照或摄像功能的电子产品。可穿戴设备可以是智能手环、智能手表、无线耳机、增强现实技术(augmented reality，AR)眼镜、增强现实技术头盔、虚拟现实技术(virtual reality，VR)眼镜及虚拟现实技术头盔等。本申请实施例以电子设备是手机为例进行说明。
请参阅图1A，图1A是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100在一些实施例中的结构示意图。
如图1A所示，一些实施例中，电子设备100包括摄像头模组10、图像处理器20、后盖30、边框40及显示屏(图中未示出)。后盖30和显示屏相背地固定于边框40两侧，后盖30、显示屏和边框40共同围设出电子设备100的整机内腔。其中，显示屏可以用于显示图像，还可以集成触控功能以实现人机交互。摄像头模组10收容于整机内腔中，摄像头模组10用于采集电子设备100外部的光学信息，并形成对应的图像信号。图像处理器20与摄像头模组10通信连接，图像处理器20用于从摄像头模组10获取图像信号，并处理图像信号。其中，摄像头模组10与图像处理器20的通信连接可以包括通过走线等电连接方式进行数据传输，也可以通过耦合等方式实现数据传输。可以理解的是，摄像头模组10与图像处理器20还可以通过其它能够实现数据传输的方式实现通信连接。
本实施例中，后盖30可以设有摄像孔31，摄像头模组10通过摄像孔31采集光线，摄像头模组10可以用作电子设备100的后置摄像头。示例性的，后盖30可以包括透光镜片，透光镜片安装于摄像孔31，以允许光线穿过，并且能够防尘、防水。
在其他一些实施例中，摄像头模组10也可以作为电子设备100的前置摄像头。示例性的，显示屏可以设有透光区域，摄像头模组10可以通过透光区域采集电子设备100外部的光学信息，在本实施例中，摄像头模组10用作电子设备100的前置摄像模组。也即，摄像头模组10可以用作电子设备100的前置摄像模组，也可以用作电子设备100的后置摄像模组，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
示例性的，如图1A所示，电子设备100的摄像头模组10可以安装于电子设备100的上部的第一端。上部的第一端和第二端分别位于上部的左右两端。可以理解的是，本申请中涉及的“上”、“下”、“左”、“右”等方位用词，是参考附加图式的方位进行的描述，并不是指示或暗指所指的装置或元件必须具有特定的方位、以特定的方位构造和操作，因此不能理解为对本申请的限制。
此外，图1A所示实施例的电子设备100的摄像头模组10的安装位置仅仅是示意性的，本申请对摄像头模组10的安装位置不做严格限定。在一些其他的实施例中，摄像头模组10也可以安装于电子设备100的其他位置，例如摄像头模组10可以安装于电子设备100的上部中间或上部的第二端、也可以安装于电子设备100的中部或下部的左端或下部的右端。
在一些其他的实施例中，电子设备100也可以包括终端本体和能够相对终端本体转动、移动或拆卸的辅助部件，摄像头模组10也可以设置在辅助部件上。
一些实施例中，电子设备100还可以包括模数转换器(也可称为A/D转换器，图中未示出)。模数转换器连接于摄像头模组10与图像处理器20之间。模数转换器用于将摄像头模组10产生的模拟图像信号转换为数字图像信号并传输至图像处理器20，再通过图像处理器20对数字图像信号进行处理、得到处理后的图像信号，处理后的图像信号可以通过显示屏进行图像或者影像显示。
一些实施例中，电子设备100还可以包括存储器(图中未示出)，存储器与图像处理器20通信连接，图像处理器20将处理后的图像信号传输至存储器中，以便于在后续需要查看图像时能够随时从存储器中查找处理后的图像信号并在显示屏上进行显示。一些实施例中，图像处理器20还会对处理后的图像信号进行压缩，再存储至存储器中，以节约存储器空间。
请参阅图1B，图1B是图1A所示摄像头模组10在一些应用场景中的视场角FOV的示意图。
示例性的，摄像头模组10可以包括第一镜头(图未示)和第二镜头(图未示)。其中，第一镜头可以作为主摄镜头。在本申请中，第一镜头对应1x(即1倍)光学变焦倍数。第二镜头可以为长焦镜头，第二镜头为第一镜头的3x(即3倍)光学变焦镜头，也即第二镜头对应3x(即3倍)光学变焦倍数。可理解地，光学变焦主要通过摄像模组内具有不同光学变焦倍数的镜头的切换来实现。镜头的光学变焦倍数能够表示镜头的光学变焦的能力，光学变焦倍数越大，能拍摄的景物就越远。
如图1B所示，当摄像头模组10进行远景拍摄时，可以采用第二镜头，第二镜头的视场角FOV可以是40°。在本实施例中，第二镜头的视场角小于60°。当摄像头模组10进行标准拍摄时，可以采用第一镜头，第一镜头的视场角可以为80°。在本实施例中，第一镜头的视场角可以大于60°，且小于120°。当摄像头模组10进行近景拍摄时，也可以采用第二镜头，第二镜头的视场角可以为120°。
请参阅图2，图2是图1A所示摄像头模组10在一些实施例中的结构示意图。
如图2所示，一些实施例中，摄像头模组10包括长焦镜头1以及感光元件2。本实施例中，摄像头模组10的第二镜头可以具有与长焦镜头1相同的结构，在其他一些实施例中，摄像头模组10的第二镜头也可以具有其他结构，本申请对此不作限定。其中，图2中虚线内的结构为长焦镜头1在一些实施例中的示意结构，本申请中的长焦镜头1还可以具有其他结构，不能将附图看作对长焦镜头1的结构的限定。
其中，感光元件2位于长焦镜头1的像侧。摄像头模组10还可以包括电路板(图中未示出)，感光元件2可以固定于电路板。光线能够穿过长焦镜头1照射到感光元件2。示例性的，摄像头模组10的工作原理为：被摄景物反射的光线通过长焦镜头1生成光学图像投射到感光元件2，感光元件2将光学图像转为电信号也即模拟图像信号并传输至模数转换器，以通过模数转换器转换为数字图像信号给图像处理器20。
其中，感光元件2(也称为图像传感器)是一种半导体芯片，表面包含有几十万到几百万的光电二极管，受到光照射时，会产生电荷。感光元件2可以是电荷耦合器件(charge cou pled device，CCD)，也可以是互补金属氧化物导体器件(complementary metal-oxide sem iconductor，CMOS)。电荷藕合器件使用一种高感光度的半导体材料制成，能把光线转变成电荷。电荷藕合器件由许多感光单位组成，通常以百万像素为单位。当电荷藕合器件表面受到光线照射时，每个感光单位会将电荷反映在组件上，所有的感光单位所产生的信号加在一起，就构成了一幅完整的画面。互补金属氧化物导体器件主要是利用硅和锗这两种元素所做成的半导体，使其在互补金属氧化物导体器件上共存着带N(带-电)和P(带+电)级的半导体，这两个互补效应所产生的电流即可被处理芯片纪录和解读成影像。
一些实施例中，感光元件2可以在垂直于摄像头模组10的厚度方向的平面上移动或者相对摄像头模组10的厚度方向发生倾斜，以实现防抖。此时，感光元件2不具有在平行于摄像头模组10的厚度方向上的运动能力，或者具有远小于对焦行程的微弱行程，以减小模组厚度。在另一些实施例中，感光元件2也可以为固定部件。
其中，长焦镜头1主要利用透镜的折射原理进行成像，即景物光线通过长焦镜头1，在成 像面上形成清晰的影像，并通过位于成像面上的感光元件2记录景物的影像。示例性的，长焦镜头1对焦于物距大于100米的对象时，也即对焦于远景时，长焦镜头1的视场角FOV小于60°，例如：半视场角HFOV可以满足：tan(HFOV)<0.5，也即视场角FOV可以为53°，或视场角FOV也可以为45°、50°、54°等。此外，长焦镜头1的像高ImgH>2毫米，也即长焦镜头1的感光元件的对角线的尺寸大于4毫米，例如：长焦镜头1的感光元件的对角线的尺寸可以为5毫米、6毫米或8毫米等。在本申请中，长焦镜头1具有小视场角和大的板面尺寸，以具有较强的远景拍摄能力，在远景拍摄中的成像质量高。其中，半视场角HFOV为长焦镜头1的最大视场角的一半。在本申请中，拍摄时物距大于100米可以看作是远景拍摄，拍摄时物距小于10厘米可以看作是近景拍摄。此外，长焦镜头1的最近对焦距离小于10厘米，以实现微距拍摄。
其中，长焦镜头1可以是直立式镜头或者是潜望式镜头，本实施例以长焦镜头1是直立式镜头为例进行描述。
一些实施例中，摄像头模组10还可以包括滤光片3。滤光片3可以位于长焦镜头1与感光元件2之间，用于滤除光线中不需要的波段，防止感光元件2产生伪色或波纹，以提高其有效分辨率和彩色还原性。示例性的，滤光片3可以为红外滤光片。其中，本实施例中滤光片3为独立部件，在其他一些实施例中，也可以取消滤光片3这一结构件，而是通过对长焦镜头1的至少一片光学元件进行表面处理或材料处理，以实现滤光。本申请不对用于实现滤光的结构件或结构的具体实施例进行严格限定。
请结合参阅图3A和图3B，图3A是图2所示摄像头模组10在收纳状态的结构示意图，图3B是图3A所示摄像头模组10在弹出状态的结构示意图。
如图3A所示，长焦镜头1可以移动至收纳状态；如图3B所示，长焦镜头1可以移动至弹出状态。当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，长焦镜头1与滤光片3之间的第一距离H1较小，示例性的，第一距离H1可以小于1mm，例如0.1mm、0.5mm等。当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。此外，在长焦镜头1与滤光片3之间设置第一距离H1，避免当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，长焦镜头1与滤光片3因碰撞或刮擦产生损伤，从而延长摄像头模组10的使用寿命。其中，第一距离H1需要兼顾对焦行程、镜头支撑件余量及温度影响等因素。在其它一些实施例中，当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，长焦镜头1也可以接触滤光片3，本申请对此不作限定。
如图3B所示，当长焦镜头1处于弹出状态时，长焦镜头1与滤光片3之间的第二距离H2大于第一距离H1。此时，长焦镜头1可以处于远景拍摄状态，并实现对焦功能。在本实施例中，长焦镜头1与滤光片3之间的第二距离H2为长焦镜头1提供充足的移动空间，长焦镜头1能够相对感光元件2移动，实现对焦功能。
一些实施例中，长焦镜头1可以包括多片单透镜，例如五片、六片、七片等。多片单透镜间隔设置。长焦镜头1从收纳状态移动至弹出状态的过程中、或从弹出状态移动至收纳状态的过程中、或在远景拍摄中对焦时，长焦镜头1的多片单透镜之间的距离不发生变化，也即长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL不变。
请结合参阅图3B和图3C，图3C是图3A所示摄像头模组10在另一种弹出状态的结构示意图，图3B所示摄像头模组10处于远景拍摄模式，图3C所示摄像头模组10处于近景拍摄模式。其中，图3B和图3C中虚线内的结构为长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2在一些实施例中的示意结构，本申请中的第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2还可以具有其他结 构，不能将附图看作对第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的结构的限定。
其中，当摄像头模组10处于弹出状态时，长焦镜头1的焦距还可以发生变化，以实现远景和近景之间的切换。
一些实施例中，长焦镜头1可以包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2。如图3B和图3C所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大。相反地，在长焦镜头1从近景切换至远景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3减小。因此，长焦镜头1在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3发生变化。
在本申请中，通过改变第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3，使得长焦镜头1既可以实现远距离拍摄且成像质量高，也可以具有较强的近景拍摄能力，实现远景到近景下的广物距成像。
此外，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大，能够获得较高的近景成像质量。在其他一些实施例中，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3也可以减小，本申请对此不作限定。
此外，第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，使得长焦镜头1的高度小于长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL，以减小长焦镜头1的高度，有利于摄像头模组10的小型化。
在本申请中，长焦镜头1具有较强的广物距对焦能力，不仅能够进行远景拍摄，还能够对10厘米以内的近景进行拍摄，且成像清晰度高，具有较高的成像质量。此外，长焦镜头1还通过合理配置第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的光焦度，使得长焦镜头1高度较小，有利于摄像头模组10的小型化。
一些实施例中，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的组合焦距，也即长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。在其他一些实施例中，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL也可以增大。
一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1、第二透镜组G2的厚度T2以及长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL满足：T1+T2<EFL。通过设置T1+T2<EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和较小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。例如：第一透镜组G1的厚度T1、第二透镜组G2的厚度T2以及长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL也可以满足：T1+T2＝0.5EFL、0.6EFL或0.8EFL等。或者，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1、第二透镜组G2的厚度T2以及长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL也可以满足：T1+T2≤0.6EFL，或，0.6EFL<T1+T2≤0.8EFL，或,0.8EFL<T1+T2<EFL。在本申请中，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1为第一透镜组G1的物侧面和像侧面之间的距离，第二透镜组G2的厚度T2为第二透镜组G2的物侧面和像侧面之间的距离。通过设置T1+T2≤0.6EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和更小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度更小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1以及第一透镜组G1的焦距F1满足：0.1<T1/F1<1。例如：第一透镜组G1的厚度T1以及第一透镜组G1的焦距F1也可以满足：T1/F1＝0.3、0.5或0.9等。或者，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1以及第一透镜组G1的焦距F 1也可以满足：0.1<T1/F1≤0.3，或，0.3<T1/F1<1。在本实施例中，通过设置0.1<T1/F1≤0.3，则第一透镜组G1的厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第一透镜组G1的移动，提高成像质量。
在本申请中，第一透镜组G1的多片透镜可以安装于第一镜筒(图未示)，第二透镜组G2的多片透镜可以安装于第二镜筒(图未示)，也即：第一透镜组G1的多片透镜和第二透镜组G2的多片透镜可以分别安装于两个镜筒，第一透镜组G1的焦距F1和第二透镜组G2的焦距F2可以单独测量得到。示例性的，可以通过焦距测量仪器分别测量第一透镜组G1的焦距F1、第二透镜组G2的焦距F2和长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL。
一些实施例中，第二透镜组G2的厚度T2以及第二透镜组G2的焦距F2满足：-1<T2/F2<-0.1。在本实施例中，通过设置-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组G2具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组G2的移动，提高成像质量。
可理解的，上述对第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第一透镜组G1的焦距F1的比值范围的限定、以及对第二透镜组G2的厚度T2和第二透镜组G2的焦距F2的比值范围的限定可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述比值范围彼此结合时，长焦镜头1能够获得较小的高度、以及更佳的对焦能力和成像质量。
一些实施例中，可以采用单群对焦的方式，简化对焦结构的运动方式，并简化对焦方法。
示例性的，如图3B和图3C所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1不动，第二透镜组G2沿光轴O向像侧移动，以增大第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3。在本实施例中，第一透镜组G1不动，通过移动第二透镜组G2进行对焦，能够简化长焦镜头1的对焦结构的运动方式，从而简化对焦方法。
在本实施例中，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离减小。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离减小。
在其他一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1沿光轴O向物侧移动，第二透镜组G2不动，以增大第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3。在本实施例中，第一透镜组G1位于第二透镜组G2的物侧，增加了可移动的光路空间，利于减小光线转折角度、减小像差，提升成像质量。此外，第二透镜组G2不动，通过移动第一透镜组G1进行对焦，能够简化长焦镜头1的对焦结构的运动方式，从而简化对焦方法。
在本实施例中，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离不变。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变。
在其他一些实施例中，可以采用双群对焦的方式，减小第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2各自的对焦行程，还能够提高第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的运动精度，提升长焦镜头1的对焦能力。示例性的，可以沿光轴O移动第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2，只要保证第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大即可。在本实施例中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2均可以运动，从而能够减小第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2各自的对焦行程，还能够提高第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的运动精度，提升长焦镜头1的对焦能力。此外，两个透镜组均可以移动，则进一步增加了可移动的光路空间，更利于减小光线转折角度、减小 像差，并进一步提升成像质量。
在本实施例中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离均发生变化。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2与成像面之间的距离均发生变化。
示例性的，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2相对感光元件2的移动方式可以为：第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离减小。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离减小。
在其他一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2相对感光元件2的移动方式也可以为：第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离均增大，也即第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离均增大，本申请对此不作限定。
一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL满足：H3<EFL，以使长焦镜头1能够实现广物距拍摄。例如：第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL可以满足：H3＝0.5EFL、0.7EFL或0.9EFL。或者，第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3可以满足：H3＝0.05毫米、0.07毫米或0.1毫米等。或者，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL可以满足：H3<0.9EFL或0.05毫米<H3<0.9EFL。其中，当第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL满足0.5EFL<H3<0.9EFL时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，能够用于10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
一些实施例中，摄像头模组10还可以包括第一驱动机构(图未示)，第一驱动机构与长焦镜头1连接，用于控制长焦镜头1沿靠近或远离感光元件2的方向移动，以实现长焦镜头1的收纳和弹出，也可以实现长焦镜头1的远景对焦。本申请可以通过第一驱动机构实现自动对焦(auto focus，AF)。
示例性的，第一驱动机构可以采用对焦马达，例如音圈马达(voice coil motor，VCM)、记忆金属(shape memory alloy)马达、陶瓷马达(piezo motor)以及步进马达(stepper motor)等。在其他一些实施例中，第一驱动机构也可以采用弹簧等能够发生弾性变形的机构。示例性的，请结合参阅图3A和图3B，当长焦镜头1处于弹出状态时，弹簧未发生弹性变形或弹簧具有较小的弾性变形，处于自然状态；当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，弹簧发生弹性变形或弾性变形量增大，处于压缩状态。当长焦镜头1从收纳状态变为弹出状态的过程中，弹簧的弹性变形量减小或弹簧恢复至自然状态，从而产生弹性力，长焦镜头1在弹簧的弹性力的驱动下从收纳状态弹出。此外，第一驱动机构也可以采用其他结构，本申请对此不作限定。
一些实施例中，摄像头模组10还可以包括第二驱动机构(图未示)，第二驱动机构与第一透镜组G1连接，用于控制第一透镜组G1沿光轴O移动，以改变第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3，实现长焦镜头1在远景模式和近景模式之间的切换。
示例性的，第二驱动机构可以采用对焦马达，例如音圈马达、记忆金属马达、陶瓷马达以及步进马达等。此外，第二驱动机构也可以采用其他结构，本申请对此不作限定。
一些实施例中，摄像头模组10还可以包括第三驱动机构(图未示)，第三驱动机构与第二透镜组G2连接，用于控制第二透镜组G2沿光轴O移动，以改变第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3，实现长焦镜头1在远景模式和近景模式之间的切换。
示例性的，第三驱动机构可以采用对焦马达，例如音圈马达、记忆金属马达、陶瓷马达以及步进马达等。此外，第三驱动机构也可以采用其他结构，本申请对此不作限定。
一些实施例中，摄像头模组10还可以包括第二驱动机构和第三驱动机构，第二驱动机构与第一透镜组G1连接，用于控制第一透镜组G1沿光轴O移动，第三驱动机构与第二透镜组G2连接，用于控制第二透镜组G2沿光轴O移动，以改变第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3，实现长焦镜头1在远景模式和近景模式之间的切换。在本实施例中，通过两个驱动机构分别驱动第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2运动，能够减小第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2各自的对焦行程，还能够提高第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的运动精度，提升长焦镜头1的对焦能力。
示例性的，第二驱动机构可以采用对焦马达，例如音圈马达、记忆金属马达、陶瓷马达以及步进马达等。第三驱动机构可以采用对焦马达，例如音圈马达、记忆金属马达、陶瓷马达以及步进马达等。此外，第二驱动机构和/或第三驱动机构也可以采用其他结构，本申请对此不作限定。在本实施例中，第二驱动机构和第三驱动机构的结构可以相同也可以不同，本申请对此不作限定。
一些实施例中，摄像头模组10还可以包括第一驱动机构以及第二驱动机构和/或第三驱动机构。其中，第一驱动机构与长焦镜头1连接，用于控制长焦镜头1沿靠近或远离感光元件2的方向移动，以实现长焦镜头1的收纳和弹出，也可以实现长焦镜头1的远景对焦。第二驱动机构与第一透镜组G1连接，用于控制第一透镜组G1沿光轴O移动，第三驱动机构与第二透镜组G2连接，用于控制第二透镜组G2沿光轴O移动，以改变第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3，实现长焦镜头1在远景模式和近景模式之间的切换。
示例性的，第一驱动机构可以采用对焦马达，例如音圈马达、记忆金属马达、陶瓷马达以及步进马达等。第二驱动机构可以采用对焦马达，例如音圈马达、记忆金属马达、陶瓷马达以及步进马达等。第三驱动机构可以采用对焦马达，例如音圈马达、记忆金属马达、陶瓷马达以及步进马达等。此外，第一驱动机构、第二驱动机构及第三驱动机构中的一者、两者或三者也可以采用其他结构，本申请对此不作限定。在本实施例中，第一驱动机构、第二驱动机构和第三驱动机构的结构可以相同，第一驱动机构、第二驱动机构和第三驱动机构中也可以存在至少一者的结构与其他机构的结构不同，本申请对此不作限定。
一些实施例中，摄像头模组10还可以包括防抖马达(图未示)。防抖马达用于驱动长焦镜头1在垂直于光轴O的方向上移动，或相对光轴O倾斜转动。防抖马达可以是记忆金属式(shape memory alloy)马达、悬丝式马达以及滚珠式马达等。
一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1的焦距F1与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL满足：F1<EFL。通过设置F1<EFL，使得第一透镜组G1的焦距较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，能够使得长焦镜头1用于10厘米以内的近景拍摄。第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，也即第一透镜组G1的焦距F1大于0。在其他一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1的焦距F1与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL还可以满足：F1≤0.9EFL，则第一透镜组G1的焦距较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，能够使得长焦镜头1用于10厘米以内的近景拍摄。此外，第一透镜组G1的焦距F1与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL还可以满足：0.9EFL<F1<EFL，本申请对此不作限定。
此外，第一透镜组G1的焦距F1小于长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL，且具有负光焦度的第二透镜组G2能够延长第一透镜组G1的焦距F1，以使得第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的组合焦距，也即长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL大于第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
在本实施例中，第二透镜组G2的焦距F2与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL可以满足：-EFL <F2。在本实施例中，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，也即第二透镜组G2的焦距F2小于0。此外，通过设置-EFL<F2，能够减小第二透镜组G2的厚度T2，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并使得第二透镜组G2焦距较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，减小马达行程。此外，第二透镜组G2的厚度T2小，能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，有利于摄像头模组10的小型化。
在其他一些实施例中，第二透镜组G2的焦距F2与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL也可以满足：F2<-EFL，本申请对此不作限定。
一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1的焦距F1与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2可以满足：1<(F1-F2)/F1<9，以提升长焦镜头1的对焦能力和成像质量。例如：第一透镜组G1的焦距F1与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2可以满足：(F1-F2)/F1＝1.1、2或3等。或者，第一透镜组G1的焦距F1与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2可以满足：1<(F1-F2)/F1≤3，或，3<(F1-F2)/F1<9，或，1.1<(F1-F2)/F1<9。
可理解地，当两个透镜组的焦距都比较小，且两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，也即(F1-F2)/F1数值较小，则会提升长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；但会增大长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，增大像差，成像可能不清晰，成像质量较差。当第二透镜组G2的焦距F2较大，且与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较大，也即(F1-F2)/F1数值较大，则会降低长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，不利于实现近景成像；但会减小长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。因此，可以根据实际应用场景的需求对两个透镜组的焦距进行设计。
可以理解的是，上述对第一透镜组G1的焦距F1与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2的比值范围的限定、以及第一透镜组G1的焦距F1和第二透镜组G2的焦距F2与长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL的比值范围的限定可以彼此独立存在，也可以相互结合。当上述三个比值范围彼此结合时，长焦镜头1能够获得更小的尺寸、以及更佳的对焦能力及成像质量。
一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1至少包括两片透镜，以提高长焦镜头1的规格，提升成像质量。示例性的，第一透镜组G1可以包括两片至四片透镜，例如三片、四片等。第一透镜组G1至少包括一片具有正光焦度的透镜。
一些实施例中，第二透镜组G2也可以包括多片透镜，以提高长焦镜头1的规格，提升成像质量。示例性的，第二透镜组G2可以包括两片至四片透镜。例如两片、三片、四片等。在其他一些实施例中，第二透镜组G2也可以包括一片透镜，本申请对此不作限定。示例性的，第二透镜组G2至少包括一片具有负光焦度的透镜。
一些实施例中，长焦镜头1可以包括四片至八片透镜，例如：五片、六片、七片等。
在本申请中，通过调整第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的透镜数量，能够获得不同规格的设计，以适应多样化的应用场景。示例性的，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的透镜的数量多，则长焦镜头1的规格高，成像质量高，但也增加了第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2内的各片透镜的设计难度；第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的透镜的数量少，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2内的各片透镜的设计难度低，但长焦镜头1的规格低，成像质量差，可以根据不同需求选择不同的透镜数量。
示例性的，如图3C所示，第一透镜组G1可以包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一片透镜L11和第二片透镜L12，第一片透镜L11的阿贝数和第二片透镜L12的阿贝数之和可以大于20，有利于长焦镜头1的色差矫正。
示例性的，第二透镜组G2的各片透镜的阿贝数之和可以大于18，有利于长焦镜头1的 色差矫正。
示例性的，如图3C所示，第二透镜组G2可以包括靠近物侧的第一片透镜L21。第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1可以满足：f11/F1<1；且第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2可以满足：f21/F2<1。例如：第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1可以满足：f11/F1＝0.5、0.6或0.8等，且第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2可以满足：f21/F2＝0.2、0.4或0.5等。
或者，第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1也可以满足：0.5<f11/F1<1。在本申请中，第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11一般作为主透镜，并增加其他透镜得到透镜组，从而通过其他透镜在第一片透镜L11的基础上进行调节，使得第一透镜组G1获得所需的光学性能。通过设计0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L11的焦距f11进行调节，以获得第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
一些实施例中，第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2也可以满足：0.2<f21/F2<1。在本申请中，第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21一般作为主透镜，并增加其他透镜得到透镜组，从而通过其他透镜在第二片透镜L21的基础上进行调节，使得第二透镜组G2获得所需的光学性能。通过设计0.2<f21/F1<1，使得第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L21的焦距f21进行调节，以获得第二透镜组G2的焦距F2。
示例性的，第一透镜组G1的多片透镜可以采用同一材质，例如玻璃、树脂等。其中，玻璃具有高折射率和低膨胀特性，使得长焦镜头1具有更好的成像质量和低温飘特性。树脂的密度低，能够减小透镜组的重量，便于移动，提升长焦镜头1的对焦能力。在其他一些实施例中，第一透镜组G1的多片透镜中至少存在一片透镜可以与其他透镜的材质不同，本申请对此不作限定。
示例性的，第一透镜组G1的多片透镜中的一片透镜可以采用玻璃，例如第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11可以采用玻璃，其他透镜可以采用树脂，从而既能够保证长焦镜头1的成像质量和低温飘特性，又能够减小透镜组的重量，提升长焦镜头1的对焦能力。
示例性的，第一透镜组G1的多片透镜可以采用注塑、模压和/或抛光磨削等工艺加工成型。
示例性的，第二透镜组G2的多片透镜可以采用同一材质，例如玻璃、树脂等。在其他一些实施例中，第二透镜组G2的多片透镜中至少存在一片透镜可以与其他透镜的材质不同，本申请对此不作限定。
示例性的，第二透镜组G2的多片透镜中的一片透镜也可以采用玻璃，例如第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21可以采用玻璃，其他透镜可以采用树脂，从而既能够保证长焦镜头1的成像质量和低温飘特性，又能够减小透镜组的重量，提升长焦镜头1的对焦能力。
示例性的，第二透镜组G2的多片透镜可以采用注塑、模压和/或抛光磨削等工艺加工成型。
一些实施例中，如图3C所示，长焦镜头1还可以包括孔径光阑4，孔径光阑4可以安装于第一透镜组G1。此时，孔径光阑4的光圈调节效果更佳，能够提高长焦镜头1的成像质量。例如，孔径光阑4可以安装于第一透镜组G1靠近物侧的一端。本实施例中，以孔径光阑4安装于第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11为例进行示意。在其他一些实施例中，孔径光阑4也可 以安装于第一透镜组G1的其他透镜、第二透镜组G2或长焦镜头1的其他位置，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
其中，孔径光阑4可以是隔圈结构或者可变扇叶结构；或者，孔径光阑4可以通过表面喷涂工艺实现，例如通过在透镜上喷涂遮光材料形成孔径光阑4。其中，孔径光阑4的位置可以是固定的，也可以是变化的。例如，孔径光阑4的位置是可变的，孔径光阑4可以依据对焦情况调节位置，以位于不同的透镜之间。
一些实施例中，长焦镜头1的至少一片透镜的光学表面为非球面，非球面形状的光学表面从近轴到外视场区域有不同的光焦度，以使成像画面具有更均衡的画质。和/或，长焦镜头1的至少一片透镜的光学表面可以为自由曲面，以校正像差。其中，非球面为绕光轴O旋转对称的表面；自由曲面可以无对称轴，也可以沿某个方向对称，或者沿某两个方向对称。
一些实施例中，长焦镜头1的多片透镜之间通过主动校准(active alignment，AA)工艺进行组装，以保证组装精度。
一些实施例中，长焦镜头1的至少一片透镜的光学表面可以形成衍射光栅结构。在本实施例中，通过合理设置衍射光栅结构，能够减少色差，也能够减少长焦镜头1的体积。
一些实施例中，长焦镜头1还可以包括液体透镜(图未示)，液体透镜可以位于第一透镜组G1与第二透镜组G2之间。在本实施例中，可以通过液体透镜增强调焦效果，以实现超近景拍摄。其中，液体透镜是将液体作为透镜、通过改变液体的曲率来改变焦距的一种结构件。
一些实施例中，长焦镜头1的至少一片透镜可以采用异形技术，以减少长焦镜头1的尺寸，使长焦镜头1能够更好地适用于小型化的电子设备100，增加了长焦镜头1的适用范围。切口可通过I-CUT工艺实现。此外，由于透镜通过切口方式降低其高度，因此透镜可以设置较大的通光口径，从而提高长焦镜头1的通光量，使得长焦镜头1的成像质量较佳。其中，也可以在镜筒、隔片等透镜的结构支撑件上采用异形技术，以减少长焦镜头1的尺寸。
一些实施例中，长焦镜头1的至少一片透镜的周侧面或支撑面可以进行黑化处理或粗化处理，以消除杂光，提高成像质量。其中，黑化处理可以是涂或镀黑色油墨等消光材料，也可以是贴膜。粗化处理主要是用于增加粗糙度。当然，在其他一些实施例中，长焦镜头1也可以通过其他方式消除杂光，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
示例性的，本申请提供了摄像头模组10的八种可能的实施例。
其中，第一至第四实施例中，长焦镜头1包括七片透镜，透镜数量较多，则长焦镜头1的规格高，成像质量高。
其中，第一和第二实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括三片透镜。在第三和第四实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括四片透镜。在第一和第二实施例中，第一透镜组G1的三片透镜中最靠近物侧的第一透镜L1为主透镜，第一透镜组G1的三片透镜中的第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3用于对第一透镜L1的焦距等参数进行调整，以使第一透镜组G1获得预设的光学性能。第一透镜组G1通过两片透镜对主透镜进行调整，光路简单，每片透镜的设计难度低，且同于调节的透镜的厚度较大，有利于加工；此外，第一透镜组G1的厚度TI较小，长焦镜头1的高度较小，便于收纳。
其中，第一和第三实施例中，通过移动第一透镜组G1、固定第二透镜组G2的方式进行对焦，使得对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的物侧面距离被摄对象距离较近，对光线的偏折程度小，减小像差，提升成像质量。在第二和第四实施例中，通过移动第二透镜组G2、固定第一透镜组G1的方式进行对焦。
其中，第五和第六实施例中，长焦镜头1包括六片透镜，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括三片透镜。第五实施例中，通过移动第一透镜组G1、固定第二透镜组G2的方式进行对焦。在第六实施例中，通过移动第二透镜组G2、固定第一透镜组G1的方式进行对焦。
其中，第七和第八实施例中，长焦镜头1包括五片透镜，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括三片透镜。第七实施例中，通过移动第一透镜组G1、固定第二透镜组G2的方式进行对焦。在第八实施例中，通过移动第二透镜组G2、固定第一透镜组G1的方式进行对焦。
以下结合附图和表格，说明摄像头模组10在多种可能的实施例中的具体结构。
请结合参阅图4A和图4B，图4A是本申请提供的第一实施例中摄像头模组10对焦于远景时的光路示意图，图4B是图4A所示摄像头模组10在对焦于50毫米的近景时的光路示意图。图4A所示摄像头模组10包括图3B所示摄像头模组10的大部分技术特征，以下主要对两者的区别进行描述，两者相同的大部分内容不再赘述。
在第一实施例中，长焦镜头1包括七片透镜，此外，第一透镜组G1包括三片透镜，通过移动第一透镜组G1、固定第二透镜组G2的方式进行对焦。
具体地，第一实施例中，摄像头模组10包括长焦镜头1、滤光片3及感光元件2，长焦镜头1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1及第二透镜组G2，第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，在长焦镜头1在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3发生变化。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3，第二透镜组G2包括物侧到像侧排列的第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6以及第七透镜L7。沿着光轴O的方向，光线依次经过第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6以及第七透镜L7，然后经过滤光片3，最终到达感光元件2。
第一实施例中，长焦镜头1包括七片透镜，透镜数量较多，则长焦镜头1的规格高，成像质量高。此外，第一透镜组G1的三片透镜中最靠近物侧的第一透镜L1为主透镜，第一透镜组G1的三片透镜中的第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3用于对第一透镜L1的焦距等参数进行调整，以使第一透镜组G1获得预设的光学性能。在本实施例中，第一透镜组G1通过两片透镜对主透镜进行调整，光路简单，每片透镜的设计难度低，且同于调节的透镜的厚度较大，有利于加工；此外，第一透镜组G1的厚度TI较小，长焦镜头1的高度较小，便于收纳。
如图4A所示，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，被远景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄远景图像。如图4B所示，长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，第一透镜组G1沿光轴O向物侧移动，被近景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄近景图像。
如图4A和图4B所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1沿光轴O向物侧移动，第二透镜组G2不动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。此外，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离不变。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变。
在第一实施例中，通过移动第一透镜组G1、固定第二透镜组G2的方式进行对焦，使得对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的物侧面距离被摄对象距离较近，对光线的偏折程度小，减小像 差，提升成像质量。
以下结合数据和仿真结果，呈现图4A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的具化方案。
请一并参考表1a至表1b，其中，表1a是图4A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中对焦远景时的各透镜和滤光片3的曲率半径、厚度、折射率(Nd)、阿贝数。其中，厚度包括透镜本身的厚度，也包括透镜之间的距离。虚拟面位于滤光片3和感光元件2之间的假想面，用于考察光斑是否汇聚。表1b是图4A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的各透镜的非球面系数。
表1a
表1b
表1a的长焦镜头1的非球面，可以利用但不限于以下非球面曲线方程式进行限定：
其中，z为非球面上距离光轴为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴上交点切面的相对距离；r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴的垂直距离；c为曲率；K为锥面系数；αi为第i阶非球面系数，可参阅表1b。
请结合参阅表1c和表1d，表1c和表1d是图4A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的基本参数。表1c中的f1至f7分别为第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7的焦距，表1d中F1和F2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的焦距，T1和T2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的厚度。
表1c
表1d
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，例如切换到对焦于近景50毫米处，第一透镜组G1向物侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2mm，也即第一透镜组G1向物侧移动的对焦行程为2mm，相较于常规镜头(通常需要大于4mm)，对焦行程明显缩短，对焦能力强。
此外，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为14.6mm；长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为12.3mm。长焦镜头1在远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，第一透镜组G1向物侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2mm，第二透镜组G2和滤光片3之间的距离(S14)不变，以采用单群对焦方式，简化对焦方法。长焦镜头1的高度增大。
在本实施例中，如表1d所示，F1<0.9EFL(0.9EFL＝0.9x14.6＝13.14)，则第一透镜组G1的焦距F1较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，有利于实现10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
此外，-EFL<F2，则第二透镜组的焦距F2较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，并缩短马达行程。
此外，(F1-F2)/F1约等于3，则两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，能够提升长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；且第二透镜组G2的焦距F2较大，从而能够减小长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。
此外，第一透镜L1的焦距f1即为第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11。0.5<f1/F1<1，也即0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L11的焦距f11进行调节，以获得第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
此外，第四透镜L4的焦距f4即为第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21。0.2<f4/F2<1，也即0.2<f21/F2<1，使得第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L21的焦距f21进行调节，以获得第二透镜组G2的焦距F2。
此外，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组G1厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；便于第一透镜组G1的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组G2具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组G2的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，T1+T2＝8，0.6EFL＝0.6x14.6＝8.76，则T1+T2<0.6EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和较小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
请结合参阅图4C和图4D，图4C是图4A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图，图4D是图4B所示对焦于50毫米的近景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图。
其中，图4C和图4D均包括长焦镜头1的轴向色差曲线图、像散场曲图以及畸变图。其中，轴向色差曲线图包括对应于系统不同波段(图示包括650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm)的球差曲线；其物理意义为，在0度视场发出的相应波长的光，通过光学系统后，相对于理想像点的偏离；其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为在光瞳处的归一化坐标。图4C和图4D中示值均较小，在对焦于远景和近景时，长焦镜头1的轴上像差(球差，色差等)校正较好。像散场曲图用于示意不同视场细光束汇聚点与理想成像面的偏离，X为弧矢方向光束，Y为子午方向光束，其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为相应视场。当某视场值过大时，则该视场像质较差或存在高级像差。图4C和图4D所示两方向场曲均较小，系统具有较好的焦深。畸变图用于表征不同视场光束汇聚点(实际像高)与理想像高的相对偏离量。图4C和图4D所示畸变较小，可以确保画面没有明显的变形。
请结合参阅图5A和图5B，图5A是本申请提供的第二实施例中摄像头模组10对焦于远景时的光路示意图，图5B是图5A所示摄像头模组10在对焦于50毫米的近景时的光路示意图。图5A所示摄像头模组10包括图3B所示摄像头模组10的大部分技术特征，以下主要对两者的区别进行描述，两者相同的大部分内容不再赘述。
在第二实施例中，长焦镜头1包括七片透镜，此外，第一透镜组G1也包括三片透镜。与第一实施例中不同，通过移动第二透镜组G2、固定第一透镜组G1的方式进行对焦。
具体地，第二实施例中，摄像头模组10包括长焦镜头1、滤光片3及感光元件2，长焦镜头1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1及第二透镜组G2，第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，在长焦镜头1在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3发生变化。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3，第二透镜组G2包括物侧到像侧排列的第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6以及第七透镜L7。沿着光轴O的方向，光线依次经过第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6以及第七透镜L7，然后经过滤光片3，最终到达感光元件2。
第二实施例中，长焦镜头1包括七片透镜，透镜数量较多，则长焦镜头1的规格高，成像质量高。此外，第一透镜组G1的三片透镜中最靠近物侧的第一透镜L1为主透镜，第一透镜组G1的三片透镜中的第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3用于对第一透镜L1的焦距等参数进行调整，以使第一透镜组G1获得预设的光学性能。在本实施例中，第一透镜组G1通过两片透镜对主透镜进行调整，光路简单，每片透镜的设计难度低，且第一透镜组G1的厚度TI较小，长焦镜头1的高度较小，便于收纳。
如图5A所示，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，被远景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄远景图像。如图5B所示，长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，第二透镜组G2沿光轴O向像侧移动，被近景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄近景图像。
如图5A和图5B所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1不动，第二透镜组G2沿光轴O向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。此外，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离减小。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近 景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离减小。
以下结合数据和仿真结果，呈现图5A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的具化方案。
请一并参考表2a和表2b，其中，表2a是图5A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中对焦远景时的各透镜和滤光片3的曲率半径、厚度、折射率(Nd)、阿贝数。其中，厚度包括透镜本身的厚度，也包括透镜之间的距离。虚拟面位于滤光片3和感光元件2之间的假想面，用于考察光斑是否汇聚。表2b是图5A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的各透镜的非球面系数。
表2a
表2b
表2a的长焦镜头1的非球面，可以利用但不限于以下非球面曲线方程式进行限定：
其中，z为非球面上距离光轴为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴上交点切面的相对距离；r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴的垂直距离；c为曲率；K为锥面系数；αi为第i阶非球面系数，可参阅表2b。
请结合参阅表2c和表2d，表2c和表2d是图5A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的基本参数。表2c中的f1至f7分别为第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7的焦距，表2d中F1和F2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的焦距，T1和T2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的厚度。
表2c
表2d
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，例如切换到对焦于近景50毫米处，第二透镜组G2向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2.3mm，也即第二透镜组G2向像侧移动的对焦行程为2.3mm，相较于常规镜头(通常需要大于4mm)，对焦行程明显缩短，对焦能力强。
此外，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为14.75mm；长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为10.5mm。长焦镜头1在远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，第二透镜组G2向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2.3mm，相应地，第二透镜组G2和滤光片3之间的距离(S14)减小2.3mm，以保持长焦镜头1的高度不变。
在本实施例中，如表2d所示，F1<0.9EFL(0.9EFL＝0.9x14.75＝13.275)，则第一透镜组G1的焦距F1较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，有利于实现10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
此外，-EFL<F2，则第二透镜组的焦距F2较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，并缩短马达行程。
此外，(F1-F2)/F1<3，则两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，能够提升长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；且第二透镜组G2的焦距F2较大，从而能够减小长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。
此外，第一透镜L1的焦距f1即为第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11。0.5<f1/F1<1，也即0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L11的焦距f11进行调节，以获得第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
此外，第四透镜L4的焦距f4即为第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21。0.2<f4/F2<1，也即0.2<f21/F2<1，使得第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L21的焦距f21进行调节，以获得第二透镜组G2的焦距F2。
此外，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组G1厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；便于第一透镜组G1的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组G2具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组G2的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，T1+T2＝7.88，0.6EFL＝0.6x14.75＝8.85，则T1+T2<0.6EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和较小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能 够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
请结合参阅图5C和图5D，图5C是图5A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图，图5D是图5B所示对焦于50毫米的近景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图。
其中，图5C和图5D均包括长焦镜头1的轴向色差曲线图、像散场曲图以及畸变图。其中，轴向色差曲线图包括对应于系统不同波段(图示包括650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm)的球差曲线；其物理意义为，在0度视场发出的相应波长的光，通过光学系统后，相对于理想像点的偏离；其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为在光瞳处的归一化坐标。图5C和图5D中示值均较小，在对焦于远景和近景时，长焦镜头1的轴上像差(球差，色差等)校正较好。像散场曲图用于示意不同视场细光束汇聚点与理想成像面的偏离，X为弧矢方向光束，Y为子午方向光束，其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为相应视场。当某视场值过大时，则该视场像质较差或存在高级像差。图5C和图5D所示两方向场曲均较小，系统具有较好的焦深。畸变图用于表征不同视场光束汇聚点(实际像高)与理想像高的相对偏离量。图5C和图5D所示畸变较小，可以确保画面没有明显的变形。
请结合参阅图6A和图6B，图6A是本申请提供的第三实施例中摄像头模组10对焦于远景时的光路示意图，图6B是图6A所示摄像头模组10在对焦于50毫米的近景时的光路示意图。图6A所示摄像头模组10包括图3B所示摄像头模组10的大部分技术特征，以下主要对两者的区别进行描述，两者相同的大部分内容不再赘述。
在第三实施例中，长焦镜头1包括七片透镜，通过移动第一透镜组G1、固定第二透镜组G2的方式进行对焦。此外，与第一实施例中不同，第一透镜组G1包括四片透镜。
具体地，第三实施例中，摄像头模组10包括长焦镜头1、滤光片3及感光元件2，长焦镜头1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1及第二透镜组G2，第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，在长焦镜头1在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3发生变化。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3和第四透镜L4，第二透镜组G2包括物侧到像侧排列的第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6以及第七透镜L7。沿着光轴O的方向，光线依次经过第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6以及第七透镜L7，然后经过滤光片3，最终到达感光元件2。
如图6A所示，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，被远景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄远景图像。如图6B所示，长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，第一透镜组G1沿光轴O向物侧移动，被近景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄近景图像。
如图6A和图6B所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1沿光轴O向物侧移动，第二透镜组G2不动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。此外，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离不变。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变。
以下结合数据和仿真结果，呈现图6A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的具化方案。
请一并参考表3a至表3b，其中，表3a是图6A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中 对焦远景时的各透镜和滤光片3的曲率半径、厚度、折射率(Nd)、阿贝数。其中，厚度包括透镜本身的厚度，也包括透镜之间的距离。虚拟面位于滤光片3和感光元件2之间的假想面，用于考察光斑是否汇聚。表3b是图6A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的各透镜的非球面系数。
表3a
表3b
表3a的长焦镜头1的非球面，可以利用但不限于以下非球面曲线方程式进行限定：
其中，z为非球面上距离光轴为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴上交点切面的相对距离；r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴的垂直距离；c为曲率；K为锥面系数；αi为第i阶非球面系数，可参阅表3b。
请结合参阅表3c和表3d，表3c和表3d是图6A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的基本参数。表3c中的f1至f7分别为第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7的焦距，表3d中F1和F2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的焦距，T1和T2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的厚度。
表3c
表3d
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，例如切换到对焦于近景50毫米处，第一透镜组G1向物侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S8)增大2mm，也即第一透镜组G1向物侧移动的对焦行程为2mm，相较于常规镜头(通常需要大于4mm)，对焦行程明显缩短，对焦能力强。
此外，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为14.55mm；长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为12.2mm。长焦镜头1在远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，第一透镜组G1向物侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S8)增大2mm，第二透镜组G2和滤光片3之间的距离(S14)不变，以采用单群对焦方式，简化对焦方法。长焦镜头1的高度增大。
在本实施例中，如表3d所示，F1<0.9EFL(0.9EFL＝0.9x14.55＝13.095)，则第一透镜组G1的焦距F1较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，有利于实现10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
此外，-EFL<F2，则第二透镜组的焦距F2较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，并缩短马达行程。
此外，(F1-F2)/F1约等于3，则两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，能够提升长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；且第二透镜组G2的焦距F2较大，从而能够减小长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。
此外，第一透镜L1的焦距f1即为第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11。0.5<f1/F1<1，也即0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L11的焦距f11进行调节，以获得第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
此外，第五透镜L5的焦距f5即为第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21。0.2<f5/F2<1，也即0.2<f21/F2<1，使得第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L21的焦距f21进行调节，以获得第二透镜组G2的焦距F2。
此外，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组G1厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；便于第一透镜组G1的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组G2具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组G2的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，T1+T2＝8.72，0.6EFL＝0.6x14.55＝8.73，则T1+T2<0.6EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和较小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能 够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
请结合参阅图6C和图6D，图6C是图6A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图，图6D是图6B所示对焦于50毫米的近景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图。
其中，图6C和图6D均包括长焦镜头1的轴向色差曲线图、像散场曲图以及畸变图。其中，轴向色差曲线图包括对应于系统不同波段(图示包括650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm)的球差曲线；其物理意义为，在0度视场发出的相应波长的光，通过光学系统后，相对于理想像点的偏离；其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为在光瞳处的归一化坐标。图6C和图6D中示值均较小，在对焦于远景和近景时，长焦镜头1的轴上像差(球差，色差等)校正较好。像散场曲图用于示意不同视场细光束汇聚点与理想成像面的偏离，X为弧矢方向光束，Y为子午方向光束，其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为相应视场。当某视场值过大时，则该视场像质较差或存在高级像差。图6C和图6D所示两方向场曲均较小，系统具有较好的焦深。畸变图用于表征不同视场光束汇聚点(实际像高)与理想像高的相对偏离量。图6C和图6D所示畸变较小，可以确保画面没有明显的变形。
请结合参阅图7A和图7B，图7A是本申请提供的第四实施例中摄像头模组10对焦于远景时的光路示意图，图7B是图7A所示摄像头模组10在对焦于50毫米的近景时的光路示意图。图7A所示摄像头模组10包括图3B所示摄像头模组10的大部分技术特征，以下主要对两者的区别进行描述，两者相同的大部分内容不再赘述。
在第四实施例中，长焦镜头1包括七片透镜。此外，与第一实施例不同，第一透镜组G1包括四片透镜，通过移动第二透镜组G2、固定第一透镜组G1的方式进行对焦。
具体地，第四实施例中，摄像头模组10包括长焦镜头1、滤光片3及感光元件2，长焦镜头1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1及第二透镜组G2，第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，在长焦镜头1在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3发生变化。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3和第四透镜L4，第二透镜组G2包括物侧到像侧排列的第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6以及第七透镜L7。沿着光轴O的方向，光线依次经过第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6以及第七透镜L7，然后经过滤光片3，最终到达感光元件2。
如图7A所示，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，被远景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄远景图像。如图7B所示，长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，第二透镜组G2沿光轴O向像侧移动，被近景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄近景图像。
如图7A和图7B所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1不动，第二透镜组G2沿光轴O向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。此外，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离减小。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离减小。
以下结合数据和仿真结果，呈现图7A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的具化方案。
请一并参考表4a和表4b，其中，表4a是图7A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中 对焦远景时的各透镜和滤光片3的曲率半径、厚度、折射率(Nd)、阿贝数。其中，厚度包括透镜本身的厚度，也包括透镜之间的距离。虚拟面位于滤光片3和感光元件2之间的假想面，用于考察光斑是否汇聚。表4b是图7A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的各透镜的非球面系数。
表4a
表4b
表4a的长焦镜头1的非球面，可以利用但不限于以下非球面曲线方程式进行限定：
其中，z为非球面上距离光轴为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴上交点切面的相对距离；r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴的垂直距离；c为曲率；K为锥面系数；αi为第i阶非球面系数，可参阅表4b。
请结合参阅表4c和表4d，表4c和表4d是图7A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的基本参数。表4c中的f1至f7分别为第一透镜L1至第七透镜L7的焦距，表4d中F1和F2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的焦距，T1和T2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的厚度。
表4c
表4d
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，例如切换到对焦于近景50毫米处，第二透镜组G2向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S8)增大2.2mm，也即第二透镜组G2向像侧移动的对焦行程为2.2mm，相较于常规镜头(通常需要大于4mm)，对焦行程明显缩短，对焦能力强。
此外，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为14.55mm；长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为10.5mm。长焦镜头1在远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，第二透镜组G2向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S8)增大2.2mm，相应地，第二透镜组G2和滤光片3之间的距离(S14)减小2.2mm，以保持长焦镜头1的高度不变。
在本实施例中，如表4d所示，F1<0.9EFL(0.9EFL＝0.9x14.55＝13.095)，则第一透镜组G1的焦距F1较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，有利于实现10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
此外，-EFL<F2，则第二透镜组的焦距F2较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，并缩短马达行程。
此外，(F1-F2)/F1约等于3，则两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，能够提升长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；且第二透镜组G2的焦距F2较大，从而能够减小长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。
此外，第一透镜L1的焦距f1即为第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11。0.5<f1/F1<1，也即0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L11的焦距f11进行调节，以获得第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
此外，第五透镜L5的焦距f5即为第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21。0.2<f5/F2<1，也即0.2<f21/F2<1，使得第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L21的焦距f21进行调节，以获得第二透镜组G2的焦距F2。
此外，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组G1厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；便于第一透镜组G1的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组G2具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组G2的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，T1+T2＝8.95，0.6EFL＝0.8x14.55＝11.64，则T1+T2<0.8EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和较小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳， 并能够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
请结合参阅图7C和图7D，图7C是图7A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图，图7D是图7B所示对焦于50毫米的近景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图。
其中，图7C和图7D均包括长焦镜头1的轴向色差曲线图、像散场曲图以及畸变图。其中，轴向色差曲线图包括对应于系统不同波段(图示包括650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm)的球差曲线；其物理意义为，在0度视场发出的相应波长的光，通过光学系统后，相对于理想像点的偏离；其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为在光瞳处的归一化坐标。图7C和图7D中示值均较小，在对焦于远景和近景时，长焦镜头1的轴上像差(球差，色差等)校正较好。像散场曲图用于示意不同视场细光束汇聚点与理想成像面的偏离，X为弧矢方向光束，Y为子午方向光束，其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为相应视场。当某视场值过大时，则该视场像质较差或存在高级像差。图7C和图7D所示两方向场曲均较小，系统具有较好的焦深。畸变图用于表征不同视场光束汇聚点(实际像高)与理想像高的相对偏离量。图7C和图7D所示畸变较小，可以确保画面没有明显的变形。
请结合参阅图8A和图8B，图8A是本申请提供的第五实施例中摄像头模组10对焦于远景时的光路示意图，图8B是图8A所示摄像头模组10在对焦于50毫米的近景时的光路示意图。图8A所示摄像头模组10包括图3B所示摄像头模组10的大部分技术特征，以下主要对两者的区别进行描述，两者相同的大部分内容不再赘述。
在第五实施例中，与第一实施例不同，长焦镜头1包括六片透镜，此外，第一透镜组G1包括三片透镜，通过移动第一透镜组G1、固定第二透镜组G2的方式进行对焦。
具体地，在第五实施例中，摄像头模组10包括长焦镜头1、滤光片3及感光元件2，长焦镜头1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1及第二透镜组G2，第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，在长焦镜头1在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3发生变化。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3，第二透镜组G2包括物侧到像侧排列的第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5以及第六透镜L6。沿着光轴O的方向，光线依次经过第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5以及第六透镜L6，然后经过滤光片3，最终到达感光元件2。
如图8A所示，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，被远景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄远景图像。如图8B所示，长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，第一透镜组G1沿光轴O向物侧移动，被近景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄近景图像。
如图8A和图8B所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1沿光轴O向物侧移动，第二透镜组G2不动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。此外，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离不变。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变。
以下结合数据和仿真结果，呈现图8A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的具化方案。
请一并参考表5a至表5b，其中，表5a是图8A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中对焦远景时的各透镜和滤光片3的曲率半径、厚度、折射率(Nd)、阿贝数。其中，厚度包括 透镜本身的厚度，也包括透镜之间的距离。虚拟面位于滤光片3和感光元件2之间的假想面，用于考察光斑是否汇聚。表5b是图8A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的各透镜的非球面系数。
表5a
表5b
表5a的长焦镜头1的非球面，可以利用但不限于以下非球面曲线方程式进行限定：
其中，z为非球面上距离光轴为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴上交点切面的相对距离；r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴的垂直距离；c为曲率；K为锥面系数；αi为第i阶非球面系数，可参阅表5b。
请结合参阅表5c和表5d，表5c和表5d是图8A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的基本参数。表5c中的f1至f6分别为第一透镜L1至第六透镜L6的焦距，表5d中F1和F2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的焦距，T1和T2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的厚度。
表5c
表5d
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，例如切换到对焦于近景50毫米处，第一透镜组G1向物侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2mm，也即第一透镜组G1向物侧移动的对焦行程为2mm，相较于常规镜头(通常需要大于4mm)，对焦行程明显缩短，对焦能力强。
此外，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为14.6mm；长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为12.4mm。长焦镜头1在远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，第一透镜组G1向物侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2mm，第二透镜组G2和滤光片3之间的距离(S12)不变，以采用单群对焦方式，简化对焦方法。长焦镜头1的高度增大。
在本实施例中，如表5d所示，F1<0.9EFL(0.9EFL＝0.9x14.6＝13.14)，则第一透镜组G1的焦距F1较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，有利于实现10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
此外，-EFL<F2，则第二透镜组的焦距F2较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，并缩短马达行程。
此外，(F1-F2)/F1约等于3，则两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，能够提升长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；且第二透镜组G2的焦距F2较大，从而能够减小长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。
此外，第一透镜L1的焦距f1即为第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11。0.5<f1/F1<1，也即0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L11的焦距f11进行调节，以获得第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
此外，第四透镜L4的焦距f4即为第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21。0.2<f4/F2<1，也即0.2<f21/F2<1，使得第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L21的焦距f21进行调节，以获得第二透镜组G2的焦距F2。
此外，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组G1厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；便于第一透镜组G1的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组G2具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组G2的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，T1+T2＝7.98，0.6EFL＝0.6x14.6＝8.76，则T1+T2<0.6EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和较小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能 够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
请结合参阅图8C和图8D，图8C是图8A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图，图8D是图8B所示对焦于50毫米的近景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图。
其中，图8C和图8D均包括长焦镜头1的轴向色差曲线图、像散场曲图以及畸变图。其中，轴向色差曲线图包括对应于系统不同波段(图示包括650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm)的球差曲线；其物理意义为，在0度视场发出的相应波长的光，通过光学系统后，相对于理想像点的偏离；其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为在光瞳处的归一化坐标。图8C和图8D中示值均较小，在对焦于远景和近景时，长焦镜头1的轴上像差(球差，色差等)校正较好。像散场曲图用于示意不同视场细光束汇聚点与理想成像面的偏离，X为弧矢方向光束，Y为子午方向光束，其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为相应视场。当某视场值过大时，则该视场像质较差或存在高级像差。图8C和图8D所示两方向场曲均较小，系统具有较好的焦深。畸变图用于表征不同视场光束汇聚点(实际像高)与理想像高的相对偏离量。图8C和图8D所示畸变较小，可以确保画面没有明显的变形。
请结合参阅图9A和图9B，图9A是本申请提供的第六实施例中摄像头模组10对焦于远景时的光路示意图，图9B是图9A所示摄像头模组10在对焦于50毫米的近景时的光路示意图。图9A所示摄像头模组10包括图3B所示摄像头模组10的大部分技术特征，以下主要对两者的区别进行描述，两者相同的大部分内容不再赘述。
第六实施例中，与第一实施例不同，长焦镜头1包括六片透镜，此外，第一透镜组G1包括三片透镜，通过移动第二透镜组G2、固定第一透镜组G1的方式进行对焦。
具体地，第六实施例中，摄像头模组10包括长焦镜头1、滤光片3及感光元件2，长焦镜头1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1及第二透镜组G2，第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，在长焦镜头1在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3发生变化。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3，第二透镜组G2包括物侧到像侧排列的第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5以及第六透镜L6。沿着光轴O的方向，光线依次经过第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5以及第六透镜L6，然后经过滤光片3，最终到达感光元件2。
第六实施例中，长焦镜头1包括六片透镜。此外，第一透镜组G1的三片透镜中最靠近物侧的第一透镜L1为主透镜，第一透镜组G1的三片透镜中的第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3用于对第一透镜L1的焦距等参数进行调整，以使第一透镜组G1获得预设的光学性能。在本实施例中，第一透镜组G1通过两片透镜对主透镜进行调整，光路简单，每片透镜的设计难度低，且第一透镜组G1的厚度TI较小，长焦镜头1的高度较小，便于收纳。
如图9A所示，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，被远景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄远景图像。如图9B所示，长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，第二透镜组G2沿光轴O向像侧移动，被近景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄近景图像。
如图9A和图9B所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1不动，第二透镜组G2沿光轴O向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。此外，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离减小。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近 景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离减小。
以下结合数据和仿真结果，呈现图9A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的具化方案。
请一并参考表6a至表6b，其中，表6a是图9A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中对焦远景时的各透镜和滤光片3的曲率半径、厚度、折射率(Nd)、阿贝数。其中，厚度包括透镜本身的厚度，也包括透镜之间的距离。虚拟面位于滤光片3和感光元件2之间的假想面，用于考察光斑是否汇聚。表6b是图9A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的各透镜的非球面系数。
表6a
表6b
表6a的长焦镜头1的非球面，可以利用但不限于以下非球面曲线方程式进行限定：
其中，z为非球面上距离光轴为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴上交点切面的相对距离；r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴的垂直距离；c为曲率；K为锥面系数；αi为第i阶非球面系数，可参阅表6b。
请结合参阅表6c和表6d，表6c和表6d是图9A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的基本参数。表6c中的f1至f6分别为第一透镜L1至第六透镜L6的焦距，表6d中F1和F2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的焦距，T1和T2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的厚度。
表6c
表6d
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，例如切换到对焦于近景50毫米处，第二透镜组G2向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2.3mm，也即第二透镜组G2向像侧移动的对焦行程为2.3mm，相较于常规镜头(通常需要大于4mm)，对焦行程明显缩短，对焦能力强。
此外，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为14.55mm；长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为10.6mm。长焦镜头1在远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，第二透镜组G2向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2.3mm，相应地，第二透镜组G2和滤光片3之间的距离(S12)减小2.3mm，以保持长焦镜头1的高度不变。
在本实施例中，如表6d所示，F1<0.9EFL(0.9EFL＝0.9x14.55＝13.095)，则第一透镜组G1的焦距F1较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，有利于实现10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
此外，-EFL<F2，则第二透镜组的焦距F2较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，并缩短马达行程。
此外，(F1-F2)/F1约等于3，则两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，能够提升长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；且第二透镜组G2的焦距F2较大，从而能够减小长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。
此外，第一透镜L1的焦距f1即为第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11。0.5<f1/F1<1，也即0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L11的焦距f11进行调节，以获得第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
此外，第四透镜L4的焦距f4即为第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21。0.2<f4/F2<1，也即0.2<f21/F2<1，使得第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L21的焦距f21进行调节，以获得第二透镜组G2的焦距F2。
此外，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组G1厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；便于第一透镜组G1的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组G2具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组G2的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，T1+T2＝8.09，0.6EFL＝0.6x14.55＝8.73，则T1+T2<0.6EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和较小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能 够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
请结合参阅图9C和图9D，图9C是图9A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图，图9D是图9B所示对焦于50毫米的近景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图。
其中，图9C和图9D均包括长焦镜头1的轴向色差曲线图、像散场曲图以及畸变图。其中，轴向色差曲线图包括对应于系统不同波段(图示包括650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm)的球差曲线；其物理意义为，在0度视场发出的相应波长的光，通过光学系统后，相对于理想像点的偏离；其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为在光瞳处的归一化坐标。图9C和图9D中示值均较小，在对焦于远景和近景时，长焦镜头1的轴上像差(球差，色差等)校正较好。像散场曲图用于示意不同视场细光束汇聚点与理想成像面的偏离，X为弧矢方向光束，Y为子午方向光束，其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为相应视场。当某视场值过大时，则该视场像质较差或存在高级像差。图9C和图9D所示两方向场曲均较小，系统具有较好的焦深。畸变图用于表征不同视场光束汇聚点(实际像高)与理想像高的相对偏离量。图9C和图9D所示畸变较小，可以确保画面没有明显的变形。
请结合参阅图10A和图10B，图10A是本申请提供的第七实施例中摄像头模组10对焦于远景时的光路示意图，图10B是图10A所示摄像头模组10在对焦于50毫米的近景时的光路示意图。图10A所示摄像头模组10包括图3B所示摄像头模组10的大部分技术特征，以下主要对两者的区别进行描述，两者相同的大部分内容不再赘述。
在第七实施例中，长焦镜头1包括五片透镜，此外，第一透镜组G1包括三片透镜，通过移动第一透镜组G1、固定第二透镜组G2的方式进行对焦。
具体地，第七实施例中，摄像头模组10包括长焦镜头1、滤光片3及感光元件2，长焦镜头1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1及第二透镜组G2，第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，在长焦镜头1在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3发生变化。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3，第二透镜组G2包括物侧到像侧排列的第四透镜L4以及第五透镜L5。沿着光轴O的方向，光线依次经过第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4以及第五透镜L5，然后经过滤光片3，最终到达感光元件2。
如图10A所示，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，被远景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄远景图像。如图10B所示，长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，第一透镜组G1沿光轴O向物侧移动，被近景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄近景图像。
如图10A和图10B所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1沿光轴O向物侧移动，第二透镜组G2不动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。此外，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离不变。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离增大、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变。
以下结合数据和仿真结果，呈现图10A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的具化方案。
请一并参考表7a至表7b，其中，表7a是图10A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中 对焦远景时的各透镜和滤光片3的曲率半径、厚度、折射率(Nd)、阿贝数。其中，厚度包括透镜本身的厚度，也包括透镜之间的距离。虚拟面位于滤光片3和感光元件2之间的假想面，用于考察光斑是否汇聚。表7b是图10A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的各透镜的非球面系数。
表7a
表7b
表7a的长焦镜头1的非球面，可以利用但不限于以下非球面曲线方程式进行限定：
其中，z为非球面上距离光轴为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴上交点切面的相对距离；r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴的垂直距离；c为曲率；K为锥面系数；αi为第i阶非球面系数，可参阅表7b。
请结合参阅表7c和表7d，表7c和表7d是图10A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的基本参数。表7c中的f1至f5分别为第一透镜L1至第五透镜L5的焦距，表7d中F1和F2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的焦距，T1和T2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的厚度。
表7c
表7d
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，例如切换到对焦于近景50毫米处，第一透镜组G1向物侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2mm，也即第一透镜组G1向物侧移动的对焦行程为2mm，相较于常规镜头(通常需要大于4mm)，对焦行程明显缩短，对焦能力强。
此外，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为14.6mm；长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为12.1mm。长焦镜头1在远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，第一透镜组G1向物侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2mm，第二透镜组G2和滤光片3之间的距离(S10)不变，以采用单群对焦方式，简化对焦方法。长焦镜头1的高度增大。
在本实施例中，如表7d所示，F1<0.9EFL(0.9EFL＝0.9x14.6＝13.14)，则第一透镜组G1的焦距F1较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，有利于实现10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
此外，-EFL<F2，则第二透镜组的焦距F2较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，并缩短马达行程。
此外，(F1-F2)/F1约等于3，则两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，能够提升长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；且第二透镜组G2的焦距F2较大，从而能够减小长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。
此外，第一透镜L1的焦距f1即为第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11。0.5<f1/F1<1，也即0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L11的焦距f11进行调节，以获得第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
此外，第四透镜L4的焦距f4即为第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21。0.2<f4/F2<1，也即0.2<f21/F2<1，使得第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L21的焦距f21进行调节，以获得第二透镜组G2的焦距F2。
此外，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组G1厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；便于第一透镜组G1的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组G2具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组G2的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，T1+T2＝7.68，0.6EFL＝0.6x14.6＝8.76，则T1+T2<0.6EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和较小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
请结合参阅图10C和图10D，图10C是图10A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图，图10D是图10B所示对焦于50毫米的近景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图。
其中，图10C和图10D均包括长焦镜头1的轴向色差曲线图、像散场曲图以及畸变图。其中，轴向色差曲线图包括对应于系统不同波段(图示包括650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm)的球差曲线；其物理意义为，在0度视场发出的相应波长的光，通过光学系统后，相对于理想像点的偏离；其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为在光瞳处的归一化坐标。图10C和图10D中示值均较小，在对焦于远景和近景时，长焦镜头1的轴上像差(球差，色差等)校正较好。像散场曲图用于示意不同视场细光束汇聚点与理想成像面的偏离，X为弧 矢方向光束，Y为子午方向光束，其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为相应视场。当某视场值过大时，则该视场像质较差或存在高级像差。图10C和图10D所示两方向场曲均较小，系统具有较好的焦深。畸变图用于表征不同视场光束汇聚点(实际像高)与理想像高的相对偏离量。图10C和图10D所示畸变较小，可以确保画面没有明显的变形。
请结合参阅图11A和图11B，图11A是本申请提供的第八实施例中摄像头模组10对焦于远景时的光路示意图，图11B是图11A所示摄像头模组10在对焦于50毫米的近景时的光路示意图。图11A所示摄像头模组10包括图3B所示摄像头模组10的大部分技术特征，以下主要对两者的区别进行描述，两者相同的大部分内容不再赘述。
在第八实施例中，长焦镜头1包括五片透镜，此外，第一透镜组G1包括三片透镜，通过移动第二透镜组G2、固定第一透镜组G1的方式进行对焦。
具体地，第八实施例中，摄像头模组10包括长焦镜头1、滤光片3及感光元件2，长焦镜头1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1及第二透镜组G2，第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度，第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度，在长焦镜头1在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3发生变化。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1的第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3，第二透镜组G2包括物侧到像侧排列的第四透镜L4以及第五透镜L5。沿着光轴O的方向，光线依次经过第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4以及第五透镜L5，然后经过滤光片3，最终到达感光元件2。
如图11A所示，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，被远景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄远景图像。如图11B所示，长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，第二透镜组G2沿光轴O向像侧移动，被近景物体反射的光线经过长焦镜头1后成像于成像面，成像面落在感光元件2上，摄像头模组10能够拍摄近景图像。
如图11A和图11B所示，在长焦镜头1从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，第一透镜组G1不动，第二透镜组G2沿光轴O向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离H3增大，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。此外，第一透镜组G1与感光元件2之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与感光元件2之间的距离减小。在本申请中，当长焦镜头1对焦于远景和近景时，成像面落在感光元件2上，也即第一透镜组G1与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离不变、且第二透镜组G2与长焦镜头1的成像面之间的距离减小。
以下结合数据和仿真结果，呈现图11A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的具化方案。
请一并参考表8a和表8b，其中，表8a是图11A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中对焦远景时的各透镜和滤光片3的曲率半径、厚度、折射率(Nd)、阿贝数。其中，厚度包括透镜本身的厚度，也包括透镜之间的距离。虚拟面位于滤光片3和感光元件2之间的假想面，用于考察光斑是否汇聚。表8b是图11A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的各透镜的非球面系数。
表8a
表8b
表8a的长焦镜头1的非球面，可以利用但不限于以下非球面曲线方程式进行限定：
其中，z为非球面上距离光轴为r的点，其与相切于非球面光轴上交点切面的相对距离；r为非球面曲线上的点与光轴的垂直距离；c为曲率；K为锥面系数；αi为第i阶非球面系数，可参阅表8b。
请结合参阅表8c和表8d，表8c和表8d是图11A所示长焦镜头1在一种可能的实施例中的基本参数。表8c中的f1至f5分别为第一透镜L1至第五透镜L5的焦距，表8d中F1和F2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的焦距，T1和T2分别为第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的厚度。
表8c
表8d
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，例如切换到对焦于近景50毫米处，第二透镜组G2向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2mm，也即第二透镜组G2向像侧移动的对焦行程为2mm，相较于常规镜头(通常需要大于4mm)，对焦行程明显缩短，对焦能力强。
此外，长焦镜头1对焦于远景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为14.6mm；长焦镜头1对焦于近景时，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL为10.7mm。长焦镜头1在远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，长焦镜头1的有效焦距EFL减小。
在本实施例中，长焦镜头1由远景切换到近景时，第二透镜组G2向像侧移动，第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2之间的距离(S6)增大2mm，相应地，第二透镜组G2和滤光片3之间的距离(S10)减小2mm，以保持长焦镜头1的高度不变。
在本实施例中，如表8d所示，F1<0.9EFL(0.9EFL＝0.9x14.6＝13.14)，则第一透镜组G1的焦距F1较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，有利于实现10厘米以内的近景拍摄。
此外，-EFL<F2，则第二透镜组的焦距F2较小，对光线的汇聚能力较强，便于对焦，并缩短马达行程。
此外，(F1-F2)/F1约等于3，则两个透镜组的焦距相差较小，能够提升长焦镜头1对光线的汇聚能力，有利于实现近景成像；且第二透镜组G2的焦距F2较大，从而能够减小长焦镜头1对光线的偏折程度，减小像差，提高成像质量。
此外，第一透镜L1的焦距f1即为第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11。0.5<f1/F1<1，也即0.5<f11/F1<1，使得第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11的焦距f11与第一透镜组G1的焦距F1相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L11的焦距f11进行调节，以获得第一透镜组G1的焦距F1。
此外，第四透镜L4的焦距f4即为第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21。0.2<f4/F2<1，也即0.2<f21/F2<1，使得第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21的焦距f21与第二透镜组G2的焦距F2相差较小，便于对第一片透镜L21的焦距f21进行调节，以获得第二透镜组G2的焦距F2。
此外，0.3<T1/F1<1，则第一透镜组G1厚度较小，从而能够减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；便于第一透镜组G1的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，-1<T2/F2<-0.1，有利于使得第二透镜组G2具有较小的厚度，从而减小长焦镜头1的高度，便于收纳；并便于第二透镜组G2的移动，提高成像质量。
此外，T1+T2＝7.96，0.6EFL＝0.6x14.6＝8.76，则T1+T2<0.6EFL，第一透镜组G1的厚度T1和第二透镜组G2的厚度T2之和较小，使得当长焦镜头1处于收纳状态时，摄像头模组10的整体高度较小，且在电子设备100的整机内腔中占据较小的空间，便于收纳，并能够更好地适用于薄型电子设备中。
请结合参阅图11C和图11D，图11C是图11A所示对焦于远景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图，图11D是图11B所示对焦于50毫米的近景时的长焦镜头1的仿真效果图。
其中，图11C和图11D均包括长焦镜头1的轴向色差曲线图、像散场曲图以及畸变图。其中，轴向色差曲线图包括对应于系统不同波段(图示包括650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm)的球差曲线；其物理意义为，在0度视场发出的相应波长的光，通过光学系统后，相对于理想像点的偏离；其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为在光瞳处的归一化坐标。图11C和图11D中示值均较小，在对焦于远景和近景时，长焦镜头1的轴上像差(球差，色差等)校正较好。像散场曲图用于示意不同视场细光束汇聚点与理想成像面的偏离，X为弧矢方向光束，Y为子午方向光束，其横坐标为沿光轴方向的偏离值，纵坐标为相应视场。当某视场值过大时，则该视场像质较差或存在高级像差。图11C和图11D所示两方向场曲均较小，系统具有较好的焦深。畸变图用于表征不同视场光束汇聚点(实际像高)与理想像高的相对偏离量。图11C和图11D所示畸变较小，可以确保画面没有明显的变形。
上述多个实施例中，图5A、图5B、图9A、图9B、图4A、图4B、图8A、图8B、图7A、图7B、图6A、图6B、图11A、图11B、图10A及图10B中所示的第一透镜组G1的第一透镜L1均对应于图3C所示的第一透镜组G1的第一片透镜L11，第一透镜组G1的第二透镜L2均对应于图3C所示的第一透镜组G1的第二片透镜L12。图5A、图5B、图9A、图9B、图4A、图4B、图8A、图8B、图11A、图11B、图10A及图10B中所示的第二透镜组G2的第四透镜L4、以及图7A、图7B、图6A及图6B中所示的第二透镜组G2的第五透镜L5均对应于图3C所示的第二透镜组G2的第一片透镜L21。
以上所述，以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案，而非对其限制；尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明，本领域的普通技术人员应当理解：其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改，或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换；而这些修改或者替换，并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。在不冲突的情况下，本申请的实施例及实施例中的特征可以相互组合。

Claims (24)

  1. 一种长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述长焦镜头对焦于远景时，所述长焦镜头的视场角小于60°；
    所述长焦镜头包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组以及第二透镜组，所述第一透镜组具有正光焦度，所述第二透镜组具有负光焦度，所述长焦镜头在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，所述第一透镜组与所述第二透镜组之间的距离变化，所述长焦镜头的最近对焦距离小于10厘米。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，在所述长焦镜头从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，所述第一透镜组与所述第二透镜组之间的距离增大。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，在所述长焦镜头从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，所述第一透镜组与所述长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离不变、且所述第二透镜组与所述长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离减小；
    或，所述第一透镜组与所述长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离增大、且所述第二透镜组与所述长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离不变；
    或，所述第一透镜组与所述长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离增大、且所述第二透镜组与所述长焦镜头的成像面之间的距离减小。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组的焦距F1与所述长焦镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：F1≤0.9EFL，或，0.9EFL<F1<EFL。
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第二透镜组的焦距F2与所述长焦镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：-EFL<F2。
  6. 根据权利要求4或5所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组的焦距F1与所述第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：1<(F1-F2)/F1≤3，或，3<(F1-F2)/F1<9。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组包括两片至四片透镜；或，所述第二透镜组包括两片至四片透镜；或，所述长焦镜头包括四片至八片透镜。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组包括靠近物侧的第一片透镜，所述第一透镜组的第一片透镜的焦距f11与所述第一透镜组的焦距F1满足：0.5<f11/F1<1；
    所述第二透镜组包括靠近物侧的第一片透镜，所述第二透镜组的第一片透镜的焦距f21与所述第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：0.2<f21/F2<1。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组还包括第二片透镜，所述第一透镜组的第二片透镜相邻地位于所述第一透镜组的第一片透镜的物侧，所述第一透镜组的第一片透镜的阿贝数与所述第一透镜组的第二片透镜的阿贝数之和大于20。
  10. 根据权利要求7至9中任一项所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第二透镜组的多片透镜的阿贝数之和大于18。
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组的厚度T1与所述第一透镜组的焦距F1满足：0.1<T1/F1≤0.3，或，0.3<T1/F1<1；
    或，所述第二透镜组的厚度T2与所述第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：-1<T2/F2<-0.1。
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组的厚度T1、所述第二透镜组的厚度T2与所述长焦镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：T1+T2≤0. 6EFL，或，0.6EFL<T1+T2≤0.8EFL，或,0.8EFL<T1+T2<EFL。
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的长焦镜头，其特征在于，所述长焦镜头的像高ImgH满足：ImgH>2毫米。
  14. 一种摄像头模组，其特征在于，包括感光元件、第一驱动机构以及权利要求1至13中任一项所述的长焦镜头，所述感光元件位于所述长焦镜头的像侧；所述第一驱动机构与所述长焦镜头连接，用于控制所述长焦镜头沿靠近或远离所述感光元件的方向移动。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的摄像头模组，其特征在于，所述摄像头模组还包括第二驱动机构，所述第二驱动机构与所述第一透镜组连接，用于控制所述第一透镜组沿光轴移动；
    和/或所述摄像头模组还包括第三驱动机构，所述第三驱动机构与所述第二透镜组连接，用于控制所述第二透镜组沿光轴移动。
  16. 一种电子设备，其特征在于，包括图像处理器和权利要求14或15所述的摄像头模组，所述图像处理器与所述摄像头模组通信连接，所述图像处理器用于从所述摄像头模组获取图像信号，并处理所述图像信号。
  17. 一种电子设备，其特征在于，包括第一镜头和第二镜头，所述第二镜头为所述第一镜头的3x光学变焦镜头；
    所述第二镜头对焦于远景时，所述第二镜头的视场角小于60°；
    所述第二镜头包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组以及第二透镜组，所述第一透镜组具有正光焦度，所述第二透镜组具有负光焦度，所述第二镜头在远景和近景之间切换的对焦过程中，所述第一透镜组与所述第二透镜组之间的距离变化，所述第二镜头的最近对焦距离小于10厘米。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的电子设备，其特征在于，在所述第二镜头从远景切换至近景的对焦过程中，所述第一透镜组与所述第二镜头的成像面之间的距离不变、且所述第二透镜组与所述第二镜头的成像面之间的距离减小；
    或，所述第一透镜组与所述第二镜头的成像面之间的距离增大、且所述第二透镜组与所述第二镜头的成像面之间的距离不变；
    或，所述第一透镜组与所述第二镜头的成像面之间的距离增大、且所述第二透镜组与所述第二镜头的成像面之间的距离减小。
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的电子设备，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组的焦距F1与所述第二镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：F1≤0.9EFL，或，0.9EFL<F1<EFL。
  20. 根据权利要求17至19中任一项所述的电子设备，其特征在于，所述第二透镜组的焦距F2与所述第二镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：-EFL<F2。
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的电子设备，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组的焦距F1与所述第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：1<(F1-F2)/F1≤3，或，3<(F1-F2)/F1<9。
  22. 根据权利要求17至21中任一项所述的电子设备，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组的厚度T1与所述第一透镜组的焦距F1满足：0.1<T1/F1≤0.3，或，0.3<T1/F1<1；
    或所述第二透镜组的厚度T2与所述第二透镜组的焦距F2满足：-1<T2/F2<-0.1。
  23. 根据权利要求17至22中任一项所述的电子设备，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组的厚度T1、所述第二透镜组的厚度T2与所述第二镜头的有效焦距EFL满足：T1+T2≤0.6EFL，或，0.6EFL<T1+T2≤0.8EFL，或,0.8EFL<T1+T2<EFL。
  24. 根据权利要求17至23中任一项所述的电子设备，其特征在于，所述第二镜头的像高ImgH满足：ImgH>2毫米。
PCT/CN2023/081097 2022-03-15 2023-03-13 长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备 WO2023174212A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210255613.4A CN116482837B (zh) 2022-03-15 2022-03-15 长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备
CN202210255613.4 2022-03-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023174212A1 true WO2023174212A1 (zh) 2023-09-21

Family

ID=87216063

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/081097 WO2023174212A1 (zh) 2022-03-15 2023-03-13 长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116482837B (zh)
WO (1) WO2023174212A1 (zh)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013061570A (ja) * 2011-09-14 2013-04-04 Ricoh Co Ltd 結像レンズおよびカメラおよび携帯情報端末装置
JP2017207768A (ja) * 2017-07-05 2017-11-24 株式会社タムロン 撮影レンズ及び撮影装置
CN206930822U (zh) * 2017-05-27 2018-01-26 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 成像镜片组
CN113126268A (zh) * 2021-05-18 2021-07-16 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 变焦镜头组
CN113946029A (zh) * 2021-10-20 2022-01-18 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 移动对焦的光学透镜组
CN114167572A (zh) * 2021-10-19 2022-03-11 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 移动对焦的光学透镜组

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009210910A (ja) * 2008-03-05 2009-09-17 Sony Corp 撮像レンズ及び撮像装置
JP5778276B2 (ja) * 2011-06-24 2015-09-16 富士フイルム株式会社 ズームレンズおよび撮像装置
CN113552706A (zh) * 2021-06-30 2021-10-26 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 电子设备

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013061570A (ja) * 2011-09-14 2013-04-04 Ricoh Co Ltd 結像レンズおよびカメラおよび携帯情報端末装置
CN206930822U (zh) * 2017-05-27 2018-01-26 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 成像镜片组
JP2017207768A (ja) * 2017-07-05 2017-11-24 株式会社タムロン 撮影レンズ及び撮影装置
CN113126268A (zh) * 2021-05-18 2021-07-16 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 变焦镜头组
CN114167572A (zh) * 2021-10-19 2022-03-11 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 移动对焦的光学透镜组
CN113946029A (zh) * 2021-10-20 2022-01-18 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 移动对焦的光学透镜组

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116482837A (zh) 2023-07-25
CN116482837B (zh) 2024-02-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN113740999B (zh) 光学镜头、镜头模组和电子设备
US20230359004A1 (en) Zoom Lens, Camera Module, and Mobile Terminal
US10948683B2 (en) Imaging lens, camera, and portable information terminal device
WO2022179632A1 (zh) 长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备
CN116774377A (zh) 一种电子设备
WO2022228189A1 (zh) 光学镜头、摄像头模组和电子设备
CN113490878B (zh) 变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端
WO2023174212A1 (zh) 长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备
CN115542522A (zh) 一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端
WO2023185942A1 (zh) 长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备
WO2024120514A1 (zh) 长焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备
CN113391427A (zh) 光学镜头、摄像头模组和终端
CN115561881B (zh) 摄像头模组和电子设备
WO2023179607A1 (zh) 光学镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备
CN117250742B (zh) 光学镜头、摄像模组及终端
US20240210664A1 (en) Optical lens, camera module, and electronic device
WO2024046056A1 (zh) 摄像头模组和电子设备
KR20230039730A (ko) 광학 렌즈, 카메라 모듈 및 단말
CN113534403A (zh) 一种摄像头模组及电子设备
CN117666099A (zh) 镜头模组和电子设备
CN117555121A (zh) 光学镜头、镜头模组及电子设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23769714

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1